Tag: Fiat

Introduction

The Italian Automotive Excellence Legacy of Fiat

Fiat has been an iconic representation of Italian automotive greatness since its founding more than a century ago. It is renowned for its classic designs, small automobiles, and a long history steeped in invention and style. Let’s discover how this illustrious brand has impacted the automobile sector as we go deeper into the world of Fiat.

Innovative Traditions:

Fabbrica Italiana Automobili Torino, or Fiat, was established in Turin, Italy, in 1899. The business was known for its inventiveness from the start, building some of the first cars in Europe. Fiat’s legacy includes the production of economical, small automobiles that have gained iconic status as well as ground-breaking innovations.

Italian Design Icon:

In terms of automobile design, Fiat has always been at the cutting edge. The vehicles of this brand are renowned for their distinct Italian flare, which is exemplified by graceful curves, chic interiors, and a dedication to form meeting function. Fiat has created a broad variety of models over the years, ranging from little city cars to stylish convertibles and useful family sedans.

Compact Vehicles for All Lifestyles:

The tiny automobiles made by Fiat are well known for being suitable for urban settings. Models like the 1957 Fiat 500, which was later updated for the modern period, have emerged as cultural icons. These compact, effective cars are a testament to Fiat’s commitment to building functional yet stylish automobiles.

Motorsports and performance:

Fiat’s participation in competitive motorsport, such as rallying and Formula One, has helped to build a reputation for excellence and innovation. Automobiles like the Fiat Abarth have come to be associated with speed and accuracy, attracting drivers looking for an exhilarating experience.

Worldwide Presence:

Fiat has a global footprint and a great deal of impact that goes far beyond Italy. While remaining faithful to its Italian heritage, the brand has continually adapted to the demands and preferences of many regions.

Future of Sustainable Electricity:

Fiat has entered the field of electric and environmentally friendly mobility in response to evolving environmental concerns. The Fiat 500e and other electric vehicles are a symbol of the company’s dedication to lowering its carbon footprint while providing effective and environmentally responsible mobility options.

Neighborhood and Culture:

With clubs and events honoring the history of the brand and the companionship of Fiat ownership, Fiat has nurtured a passionate and committed community of enthusiasts. Fiat has had an impact on art, fashion, and design in addition to the automotive industry.

Conclusion:

Fiat is more than just a manufacturer; it’s a representation of Italian style, innovation, and the love of the open road. Every Fiat model is an example of the company’s dedication to building vehicles that are more than just modes of transportation; they are also expressions of style, culture, and a passion for the open road.

Discover Fiat, where recognizable design combines with usefulness and every journey is a tribute to Italian tradition. It’s more than simply a car; it’s a symbol of Fiat’s steadfast commitment to excellence in the automotive industry. Thank you for visiting the world of Fiat, where driving is an art.

What we are doing?

We are publishing the Fiat user guides, User Manuals, and Owner Instructions. Everything you need to know about your Fiat vehicles to get any fixes. Get the Owner’s Manual for your specific Fiat online.

Readable and Downloadable

Find information on how to operate your Fiat vehicle manuals. Read the complete and specific sections and Download your manual if you have to.
Fiat User Guides – Autouserguide.com

Fiat

2022 Fiat 500X Dashboard Warning and Indicator Lights

In a 2022 Fiat 500X, the dashboard warning and indication lights act as the car’s silent communicators, relaying important details about the performance and safety state of the vehicle. Your dashboard is illuminated by these little but effective symbols to inform you of various situations, potential problems, or required tasks. For your Fiat 500X’s health and lifespan, it is crucial to comprehend the significance of these lights. We will solve the puzzle of the several warning lights on the dashboard of your Fiat 500X in this article. You’ll learn what each light signifies and how to react accordingly, from familiar signs like the check engine light and oil pressure warning to less well-known ones that denote traction control or tire pressure. You may have a safer and more dependable driving experience in your 2022 Fiat 500X by understanding these signals. So let’s proceed on this enlightening adventure to make sure you stay informed about the condition of your car.

SYMBOL GLOSSARY

Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the definition of each symbol.

NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.

Red Warning Lights
	Air Bag Warning Light This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault with the airbag, and will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
	Brake Warning Light This warning light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System reservoir. If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level. The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
	Battery Charge Warning Light This warning light will illuminate when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related component.

Red Warning Lights
	Coolant Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. NOTE: As the coolant temperature gauge approaches “H,” this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound.
	Drowsiness Detected Warning Light Driver drowsiness detection helps to avoid crashes caused by fatigue by advising drivers to take a break in time. Once a Drowsy Driver is detected, A pop-up will display continuously until the driver presses the OK button to clear. Once the pop-up message is cleared, it is stored until the condition is no longer true.
	Door Open Warning Light This indicator will illuminate when one or more door(s) are not fully closed. NOTE: If the vehicle is moving and a door is opened, there will also be a single chime.
	Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light This warning light will turn on when there’s a fault with the EPS system
	Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light This warning light will illuminate to indicate a problem with the ETC system. If a problem is detected while the vehicle is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. NOTE: This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake pedals are pressed at the same time. If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
	Hood Open Warning Light This warning light will illuminate when the hood is left open and not fully closed.
	Oil Pressure Warning Light This warning light will illuminate to indicate low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A chime will sound when this light turns on. Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
	Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light This warning light indicates when the driver or passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound Ú page 201.

Red Warning Lights
	Transmission Fault Warning Light This light will illuminate (together with a message in the instrument cluster display and a buzzer) to indicate a transmission fault. Contact an authorized dealer if the message remains after restarting the engine.
	Vehicle Security Warning Light This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security system is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
	Trunk Open Warning Light This indicator will illuminate when the trunk is open and not fully closed.

Yellow Warning Lights
	Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning Light Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning Light — If Equipped This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault in the ACC system. Contact a local authorized dealer for service Ú page 98.
	Anti-lock brake System (ABS) Warning Light This warning light monitors the ABS. The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required as soon as possible. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, have the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer.
	Audio System Failure Light This light will illuminate to report a failure of the Audio System. Contact an authorized dealership as soon as possible.
	Electric Park Brake Warning Light This warning light will illuminate to indicate the Electric Park Brake is not functioning properly and service is required. Contact an authorized dealer.

Yellow Warning Lights
	Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light This warning light will indicate when the ESC system is Active. The ESC Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine running. If the ESC Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this warning light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive. This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.
	Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light This warning light indicates the ESC is off. Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off previously.
	Drive Mode System Overheating This symbol appears, together with a dedicated message on the display, in case of overheating of the Drive Mode Selector system. In these conditions, the Drive Mode Selector system can still be used to select the required driving mode, but the mode will be engaged only when the system cools down. The symbol will stay on for as long as the overheating condition persists.
	Exterior Light Failure Indicator Light The External Light Failure Indicator will come on when a failure to one of the following lights is detected: Direction Indicators Backup Lights Parking Lights Daytime Running Lights License Plate Lights The failure relating to these lights could be: One or more blown bulbs A blown protection fuse A break in the electrical connection
	Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light This warning light will illuminate when the fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disengage the light. If the light does not turn off, please see an authorized dealer.
	Low Fuel Warning Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 1.3–1.8 gal (5–7 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added.
	LaneSense Warning Light The LaneSense Warning Light will be solid yellow when the vehicle is approaching a lane marker. The warning light will flash when the vehicle is crossing the lane marker Ú page 112.
	Service LaneSense Warning Light This warning light will illuminate when the LaneSense system is not operating and requires service. Please see an authorized dealer.

Yellow Warning Lights
	Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL) The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. This warning light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before the engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly? Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after the engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing. When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible if this occurs.
	Service Warning Light The “Maintenance Plan” includes vehicle maintenance at fixed intervals. For further information Ú page 255. This message is displayed automatically along with the warning light when the key is turned to RUN – 1,242 miles (2,000 km) or 30 days before these deadlines and reappears every time the key is turned to RUN. The indication will appear in miles or kilometers according to the “Unit Of Measurement” settings. When the next scheduled service is approaching and the key is turned to RUN, the word “Service” will appear on the display, followed by the number of miles or kilometers left. Contact an authorized dealership. The operations in the “Maintenance Plan” will be performed and the message will be reset
	Service Stop/Start System Warning Light This warning light will illuminate when the Stop/Start system is not functioning properly and service is required. Contact an authorized dealer for service.
	Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed. Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned previously, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire.
	Transmission Temperature Warning Light This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into PARK and run the engine at idle or slightly higher until the light turns off.
	Drowsiness Detected System Fault Warning Light This warning light will illuminate when the Drowsiness Detected System is not operating correctly and requires service. Please see an authorized dealer.

Yellow Indicator Lights
	Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light The External Light Failure Indicator will come on when a failure to one of the following lights is detected: Direction Indicators Backup Lights Parking Lights Daytime Running Lights License Plate Lights The failure relating to these lights could be: One or more blown bulbs A blown protection fuse A break in the electrical connection
	Full Brake Control System Indicator Light This telltale will turn on to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
	Full Brake Control System Off Indicator Light This indicator light illuminates to indicate that the Full Brake Control System is off.
	Fuel Cutoff Failure Light This light will illuminate if there is a fuel cutoff failure. If this light illuminates, take it to an authorized dealer and have them inspect it.
	Fuel Cutoff Indicator Light This telltale will illuminate after an accident has occurred, and the system has shut the fuel off.
	Fuel Level Sensor Failure This light illuminates when there is a fuel level sensor failure. If this light illuminates, take it to an authorized dealer and have them inspect it.
	Icy Road Condition Indicator Light This light will illuminate during an icy road condition.
	Immobilizer Fail/VPS Electrical Alarm Indicator Light This telltale will illuminate when the vehicle security system system has detected an attempt to break into the vehicle.

Green Indicator Lights
	Sport Mode Indicator Light This light will turn on when Sport Mode is active.
	Cruise Control Set Indicator Light This light will turn on when the cruise control is set to the desired speed.
	Front Fog Indicator Light This indicator light will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.

Green Indicator Lights
	LaneSense Indicator Light The LaneSense indicator light illuminates solid green when both lane markings have been detected and the system is “armed” and ready to provide visual and torque warnings if an unintentional lane departure occurs Ú page 112.
	Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light This indicator light will illuminate when the parking lights or headlights are turned on.
	Stop/Start Active Indicator Light This indicator light will illuminate when the Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode.
	Turn Signal Indicator Lights When the left or right turn signal is activated, the turn signal indicator will flash independently and the corresponding exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be activated when the multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up (right). NOTE: A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on. Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.

White Indicator Lights
	LaneSense Indicator Light When the LaneSense system is ON, but not armed, the LaneSense indicator light illuminates solid white. This occurs when only left, right, or neither lane line has been detected. If a single lane line is detected, the system is ready to provide only visual warnings if an unintentional lane departure occurs on the detected lane line Ú page 112.
	Light Sensor Failure Indicator Light This light illuminates when there is light sensor failure. If this light illuminates, have an authorized dealer inspect it.
	Speed Warning Indicator Light The indicator light will illuminate white along with a notification text message (Speed Warning Set to XX followed by unit). When the set speed is exceeded, a single chime will sound along with a pop-up message of “Speed Warning Exceeded.” Speed Warning can be turned on and off in the instrument cluster display. The number “55” is only an example of a speed that can be set.

White Indicator Lights
	Sport Mode Indicator Light This light will turn on when Sport Mode is active.
	Idle Coasting Indicator Light The Idle Coasting feature works by allowing engine speeds to drop to idle, saving fuel. This feature is a menu option. The indicator is only seen when Idle Coasting is chosen and active.

Blue Indicator Lights

High Beam Indicator Light

This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the high-beam headlights are on. With the low beams activated, push the multifunction lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward
(toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, “flash to pass” scenario.

Gray Indicator Lights
	Cruise Control Ready/Canceled Indicator Light This light will turn on when the cruise control has been turned on, but not set, or canceled by the driver Ú page 97.

FAQs

What does my Fiat 500X’s red battery warning light mean?

The red battery warning light signifies a problem with the charging mechanism in your car. The issue can be with the alternator or the battery.

Why is my Fiat 500X’s check engine light on?

The check engine light signals an issue with the emissions system or engine. Checking it is crucial because it may be a simple problem or something more serious.

What does the dashboard’s yellow exclamation point enclosed in a triangle represent?

The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) warning light, which is represented by a yellow exclamation point enclosed in a triangle, indicates that your tire pressure is too low. Check tire pressure and make necessary adjustments.

What does my dashboard’s red thermometer indicator mean?

The red thermometer icon represents the engine coolant temperature warning light, to be precise. You should stop, let the engine cool off, and inspect the cooling system because it indicates that the engine is overheating.

Why is the oil can light on my dashboard illuminated?

The oil can symbol denotes low engine oil pressure, to be precise. Check the oil level as soon as you stop the car. Running the engine with insufficient oil pressure might seriously harm it.

What does the dashboard’s blue “i” with a circle around it stand for?

The information light, which is represented by a blue “i” with a circle around it, lets you know when you have a message or warning to check on your device.

Why is my Fiat 500X’s ABS warning light on?

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light indicates a problem with the ABS system, to be precise. The ABS may not be functioning properly, but your brakes will still work. Check it out.

What does the red “P” on my dashboard stand for?

The red “P” denotes the parking brake warning light, to be precise. It suggests that the parking brake is applied or that a parking brake system issue might exist.

Why does my car’s red airbag warning light come on?

The red airbag warning light denotes an airbag system malfunction, to be precise. In the event of a collision, your airbags might not deploy, so it’s imperative to have it.

What does the yellow wrench mean on my Fiat 500X’s dashboard?

The service indicator light is the yellow wrench, to be precise. It serves as a reminder that your car needs routine maintenance or servicing. For specific information, consult your owner’s handbook.

Why does the red key icon on my dashboard keep flashing?

The red key indication denotes a malfunction with either the key or the immobilizer system. If the problem still exists, try a different key and then have a technician examine it.

What does my dashboard’s green headlight icon mean?

A reminder to turn on your headlights is represented by the green headlight emblem. It ensures visibility throughout the day and is typically related to daylight running lights (DRLs).

Why does the yellow engine-shaped icon on my dashboard keep flashing?

The Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) light is represented by the yellow engine-shaped icon. It suggests an issue with the electronic throttle system, which could have an impact on how well the engine performs.

What does my Fiat 500X’s green “Eco” light mean?

The green “Eco” light on your car means that it is working as sustainably as possible, usually by maximizing fuel efficiency.

What is the purpose of the dashboard’s red seatbelt symbol illumination?

The red seatbelt reminder serves as a reminder to buckle up. Until all passengers are safely buckled into their seatbelts, it may flash or stay on.

Useful Link

View full pdf: 2022 Fiat 500X User Manual
2022 Fiat 500X Keys and Smart Key Setup Guide

Tags Dashboard Warning Lights, Fiat, Fiat 500X, indicators"

Fiat

2020 Fiat 124 Spider Keys and Smart Key Setup Guide

The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider is a sporty convertible automobile that blends traditional Italian style with cutting-edge automotive technology. It is a sleek and fashionable vehicle. The advanced key and smart key systems of this exceptional car are one of its most notable characteristics because they not only increase convenience but also provide driving a more upscale feel. The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider’s keys and smart key technology will be covered in detail in this introduction, along with the unique features and advantages that make it stand out from other modern cars. The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider’s core systems provide an intriguing look at the meeting point of heritage and modernity, whether you’re a die-hard auto enthusiast or just looking to add a little elegance to your daily life.

The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider goes above and above in terms of convenience by including a smart key system in addition to the regular key fob. The proximity key, often known as a smart key, enables keyless entry and ignition. When you approach the car, the doors will automatically unlock when you pull the handle, and the engine may be started with a push-button as long as the smart key is in your pocket or purse. This unique technique doesn’t just save you time and effort; it also increases security. Unauthorized people will normally have a very tough time getting into or starting your car because the smart key system is typically fitted with cutting-edge encryption and authentication mechanisms. Overall, the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider’s key and smart key systems are a perfect embodiment of form meeting function, tradition meeting technology, and style meeting convenience. They play a crucial role in elevating the overall driving experience, making every journey behind the wheel of this Italian masterpiece all the more enjoyable and effortless.

KEYS

Key Fob
A code number is stamped on the plate an d attached to the key fob. Detach this plat e and store it in a safe place (not in the vehicle) in case you need to replace the emergency key.
Also, write down the code number and keep it in a separate safe and convenient place. Do not keep it in the vehicle. If the key fob is lost, contact an authorize d dealer.

NOTE:
Key fob configuration may vary wit h equipped features. Please see the example shown below:

Key Fob

Emergency Key
Key Fob
Key Code Number Plate

To use the emergency key, push the mechanical latch on the back side of the key fob an d pull out the emergency key.

NOTE:

Always keep a spare key fob if one is lost. If a key fob is lost, see an authorize d dealer as soon as possible.
The driver must carry the key fob to ensure the Keyless Entry System functions properly.

WARNING

Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic transmission into PARK or the manual transmission into FIRST gear o r REVERSE, apply the parking brake, the n turn the engine OFF, remove the key fo b from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle , or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parkin g brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible t o children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.

Key Fob Functions

With A Vehicle Security Alarm System
The hazard warning lights will flash when the vehicle security alarm system is armed o r disarmed.

With Advanced Keyless Function
A beep will sound when the doors, trunk lid, and fuel filler door are locked or unlocked using the key fob. The beep volume can b e adjusted or turned off.
Use the following procedure to change the beep setting:

Place the ignition to the OFF position , and close the doors and the trunk lid.
Open the driver’s door.
Within 30 seconds of opening the driver’ s door, push and hold the lock button o n the key fob for five seconds.

NOTE:

The doors, trunk lid, and fuel filler doo r will lock, and the beep will activate at the current volume (if the beep is currently set to not activate, it will not activate).
The setting changes when the lock button on the key fob is pushed, and the beep will activate at the set volume (if the beep sound has been set to not activate, it will not activate).

Complete changing the setting by doing an y of the following:

Placing the ignition in the ACC or ON position.
Closing the driver’s door.
Opening the trunk lid.
Not operating the key fob for ten seconds.
Pushing any button, except the lock button on the key fob.
Pushing a request switch on the exterior door handle.

NOTE:
Refer to “Doors” in this chapter for furthe r information.
The operation indicator light on the key fo b flashes when the buttons are pushed.

Key Fob Buttons

Lock Button
To lock the doors, trunk lid, and fuel filler door, push the lock button on the key fob. The hazard warning lights will flash once an d a beep will sound.

Unlock Button
To unlock the doors and trunk lid, push the unlock button on the key fob, and the hazard warning lights will flash twice.
The system can be set to unlock both doors. Use the following procedure to change the setting:

Place the ignition in the OFF position , and close the doors and trunk lid.
Open the driver’s door.
Within 30 seconds of opening the driver’ s door, push and hold the unlock button o n the key fob for five seconds.

NOTE:
The sound of the doors locking/unlocking can be heard. After this, the system will change the setting when the unlock button is pushed (the sound of the doors locking/unlocking can be heard).

The setting change can be completed by doing any one of the following:

Placing the ignition in the ACC or ON position.
Closing the driver’s door.
Opening the trunk lid.
Not operating the key fob for ten seconds.
Pushing any button except the unlock button on the key fob.
Pushing a request switch on the exterior door handle.

Trunk Button
To open the trunk lid, push and hold the trunk button until the trunk lid opens.

Panic Button
To turn the Panic Alarm on or off, push an d hold the panic button on the key fob an d release. When the Panic Alarm is on, th e headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and th e turn signal lights will flash.

NOTE:
The panic button will work if the doors o r trunk are opened or closed.

Turning On The Alarm
Pushing the panic button for one second or more will trigger the alarm for about two minutes and thirty seconds, and the following will occur:

The horn sounds intermittently.
The hazard warning lights flash.

Turning Off The Alarm
The alarm will stop by pushing any button o n the key fob.

Operational Range
The system operates only when the driver i s in the vehicle or within operational range, and the key fob is being carried.

Starting The Engine
Starting the engine may be possible even i f the key fob is outside the vehicle and clos e to a door or window. Always start the engin e from the driver’s seat.
If the vehicle is started, and the key fob i s not in the vehicle, the vehicle will not restar t after it is shut off. The ignition is placed i n the OFF position.

Key Fob Antenna Location

Interior Antenna
Operational Range

NOTE:
The engine may not start if the key fob is placed in or around the following areas:

Around The Instrument Panel
In The Storage Compartments

Key Fob Battery Replacement
If the key fob does not work, and the indicator lights do not flash, the battery may b e low or depleted.
Replace with a new battery (CR2025 type ) before the key fob becomes unusable.

The following conditions indicate that the battery power is low:

Key indicator light (green) flashes in the instrument cluster for about 3 0 seconds after the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
The system does not operate, and the operation indicator light on the key fob does not flash when the buttons are pushed.
The system’s operational range is reduced.

NOTE:
Replacing the battery at an authorized dealer is recommended to prevent damage to the key fob. If replacing the battery alone, follow the instructions below.

Replacing The Key Fob Battery

Proceed as follows:

Push the mechanical release button and remove the emergency key.
Emergency Key Removed
1. Emergency Key
2. Key Fob Case With Mechanical Re-lease Button
Insert a coin, a flat blade screw driver, or the tip of your emergency key into the now exposed slot and carefully pry in the direction of the arrows to open the cover slightly.Pry Case Left Side
Insert a coin, a flat blade screw driver, or the tip of your emergency key into the side gap and carefully pry in the direction of the arrow to open the cover.Pry Case Right Side
Separate the key fob case, then remove the battery.
Remove Back Cover For Battery Replacement
1. Key Fob Battery
2. Key Fob Case
Insert a new battery with the positive pol e facing up. Then, cover the battery wit h the battery cap.
Close the cover and reinsert the emer-gency key.

Install New Battery

NOTE:
Be careful not to allow the rubber ring to b e scratched or damaged. If the rubber ring comes out, reinstall it before inserting a ne w battery.

Key Suspend Function
If a key fob is left in the vehicle, key fob functions are temporarily suspended t o prevent unlawful use of the vehicle.
To restore the functions, push the unlock button on the functions-suspended key fob.

Engine Start Function When Key Fob Battery Is Discharged
If a key fob has discharged or malfunctioned, start the engine by holding the key fob over the START/STOP ignition button. Be careful to not allow the following because the signal from the key fob will not be receive d correctly, and the engine may not start:

Contact with metal parts of other key fobs or metal objects
Contact from key fobs from other vehicle’s equipped with an immobilizer system
Contact with devices for electronic purchases or security passage touch

No Keys Touching The Key Fob

No Key Fob Touching The Key Fob

If the engine cannot be started due to a discharged key fob battery, the engine ca n be started using the following procedure:

Continue to depress the brake pedal firmly until the engine has completely started.
Manual Transmission: Continue t o depress the clutch pedal firmly until the engine has completely started.
Verify that the keyless ignition start indi-cator light (green) flashes.
Touch the START/STOP ignition button using the backside of the key fob while the keyless ignition start indicator light (green) flashes.
Verify that the keyless ignition start indicator light (green) turns on.
Push the START/STOP ignition button t o start the engine.

Discharged Key Fob Battery Start Procedure

When touching the START/STOP ignition button using the backside of the key fob, touch the START/STOP ignition button wit h the key fob buttons facing up.
The engine cannot be started unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed (manual transmission) or the brake pedal is full y depressed (automatic transmission). If there is a malfunction with the START/STOP ignition button function, the keyless ignition start indicator light (amber) flashes. In this case, the engine may start. However, contact an authorized dealer as soon a s possible. If the keyless ignition start indicator light (green) does not illuminate, perform the operation from the beginning. If it does no t illuminate, contact an authorized dealer. To change the ignition position without starting the engine, perform the following operations after the keyless ignition star t indicator light (green) turns on:

Release the clutch pedal (manual trans-mission) or brake pedal (automatic trans-mission).
Push the START/STOP ignition button t o change the ignition position. The ignition cycles in the order of ACC, ON, and OF F each time the START/STOP ignition button is pushed.

NOTE:
To change the ignition position again, perform the operation from the beginning.

Emergency Operation For Starting The Engine
If the key warning light (red) illuminates, o r the keyless ignition start indicator light (amber) flashes, this could indicate that the engine may not start using the usual starting method. Contact an authorized dealer a s soon as possible. If this occurs, the engine can b e force-started. push and hold the START/STOP ignition button until the engine starts.
Other procedures necessary for starting the engine such as having the key fob in the vehicle, and depressing the clutch pedal (manual transmission) or the brake pedal (automatic transmission) are required.

Key Fob Cautions
Because the key fob uses low-intensity radio waves, it may not function under the following conditions:

The key fob is carried with a communication device such as cellular phones
The key fob contacts or is covered by a metal object
The key fob is near electronic devices such as personal computers
Non-FCA genuine electronic equipment is installed in the vehicle
There is equipment which discharges radio waves near the vehicle
The key fob may consume battery power excessively if it receives high-intensity radio waves. Do not place the key fob near electronic devices such as televisions o r personal computers

To avoid damage to the key fob, DO NOT:

Drop the key fob
Get the key fob wet
Disassemble the key fob unless replacing the battery
Expose the key fob to high temperatures such as direct sunlight
Expose the key fob to any kind of magnetic field
Place heavy objects on the key fob
Put the key fob in an ultrasonic cleaner
Put any magnetized objects close to the key fob

General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FC C Rules and with Innovation, Science an d Economic Development Canad a license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference, and
This device must accept any interference received, including interference that ma y cause undesired operation.

NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority t o operate the equipment.

FAQs

What number of keys are included with the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider?

The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider normally comes with two keys.

Can I get more keys for my Fiat 124 Spider on order?

The answer is that you can get extra keys from a Fiat dealership.

How can I use the key fob to unlock the car?

To unlock the automobile, merely press the unlock button on the key fob.

What is the key fob’s remote unlocking range?

The range can change, but it usually lies between 30 and 50 feet.

Can I use the key fob to start the car?

The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider lacks a key fob-based remote start option.

How should I proceed if I misplace my key fob?

Get in touch with your local Fiat dealership right away to order a replacement key fob.

How do I change the battery in my key fob?

The CR2032 battery may typically be changed in the key fob by prying it open.

Can I set up a new key fob on my own?

Typically, key fob programming necessitates a trip to the dealership.

What is the purpose of the key fob’s emergency key?

In the event that the battery in the key fob dies, the driver’s side door can be manually unlocked using the emergency key.

Can I change the smart key system’s settings?

Auto-lock and auto-unlock settings, for example, can frequently be altered through the vehicle’s settings.

How can I temporarily turn off the smart key system?

Normally, the smart key system can be turned off by pushing the lock button on the key fob while still inside the car.

What should I do if the key fob breaks?

In case the key fob battery needs to be replaced, get in touch with your dealership.

Can I access the trunk with the key fob?

Yes, the majority of Fiat 124 Spider key fobs have a trunk release button.

How does one go about reprogramming a key fob?

Key fob reprogramming typically requires a trip to the dealership because it calls for specialized tools.

Does the Fiat 124 Spider have a spare key slot for unexpected circumstances?

Yes, you can normally slide the emergency key into a slot on the center console if the battery dies.

Useful Links

View full PDF: 2020 Fiat 124 Spider User Manual
2020 Fiat 124 Spider Alarm System Quick Guide

Tags Fiat, Fiat 124 Spider, Keys, Smart Key

Fiat

2020 Fiat 124 Spider Alarm System Quick Guide

A modern alarm system is included with the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider to protect the safety and security of the vehicle and its occupants. This sleek and fashionable sports car also excels in performance. The alarm system in the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider is built to give drivers peace of mind and safeguard their significant investment in a time when security is of the utmost importance. This smart solution fortifies your defenses against theft and illegal access by fusing cutting-edge technology with convenient features.

The alarm system in the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider will be thoroughly discussed in this introduction, with an emphasis on its usefulness in protecting the car and enriching the entire ownership experience. Whether you value security in your daily driving or are a fervent sports car enthusiast, the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider’s alarm system is a tribute to the company’s dedication to both performance and safety.

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

Modifications And Add-On Equipment
FCA cannot guarantee the immobilizer an d security alarm system operation if the system has been modified or if any add-on equipment has been installed.

NOTE:
To avoid damage to the vehicle, do no t modify the system or install any add-o n equipment to the immobilizer, the security alarm system, or the vehicle.

Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system allows the engine t o start only with a recognized key fob.
If someone attempts to start the engine wit h an unrecognized key fob, the engine will not start, preventing unlawful vehicle use.
If you have a problem with the immobilize r system or the key fob, contact an authorized dealer.

To avoid damage to the key fob, DO NOT:

Drop the key fob
Get the key fob wet
Expose the key fob to any kind of magnetic field
Expose the key fob to high temperature s such as direct sunlight

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If the engine does not start with the correct key fob, and the warning light keeps illu-minating or flashing, the system may have a malfunction. Contact an authorized dealer.
The key fobs carry a unique electronic code. For this reason, and to assure your safety, obtaining a replacement key fob can only be done through an authorize d dealer, and will require some waiting time.
Always keep a spare key fob in case one is lost. If a key fob is lost, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
If you lose a key fob, an authorized dealer will reset the electronic codes of you r remaining key fobs and immobilize r system. Bring all the remaining key fobs to an authorized dealer to reset. Starting the vehicle with a key fob that has not bee n reset is not possible.

Operation
The engine may not start and warning light may illuminate or flash if the key fob is placed in an area difficult for the system t o detect the signal, such as on the instrument panel. Move the key fob to a location withi n the signal range, place the ignition in the OFF position, and restart the engine.

NOTE:
Signals from a TV, radio station, transceiver, or mobile telephone could interfere with your immobilizer system. If you are using the proper key fob and the engine fails to start, check the warning light.

Arming
The system is armed when the ignition is cycled from the ON to OFF position. The warning light in the instrument cluster flashes every two seconds until the system is disarmed.

Disarming
The system is disarmed when the ignition is placed in the ON position with the correct programmed key fob. The warning light illuminates for about three seconds and the n turns off. If the engine does not start with the correct key fob, and the warning light remains illuminated or flashing, try the following:

Make sure the key fob is within the operational range for signal transmission.
Place the ignition in the OFF position, and then restart the engine. If the engine doe s not start after three or more tries, contact an authorized dealer.

NOTE:

If the warning light flashes continuously while you are driving, do not turn the engine off. Contact an authorized dealer and have it checked. If the engine is shut off while the warning light is flashing , it will not be able to be restarted.
Because the electronic codes are reset when the immobilizer system is repaired , the keys are needed. Make sure to bring all the key fobs to an authorized dealer s o that they can be programmed.

Vehicle Security Alarm System — If Equipped
If the security alarm system detects an inap-propriate entry into the vehicle, or the intrusion sensor detects movement in the vehicle, which could result in the vehicle or it s contents being stolen, the alarm alerts the surrounding area by sounding the siren/horn and flashing the hazard warning lights. The system will not function unless it is properly armed. Follow the arming procedure correctly.

Siren/Horn Triggering Conditions
The siren/horn sounds intermittently, and the hazard warning lights flash for about 3 0 seconds when the system is triggered by an y one of the following:

Unlocking a door with an inside door lock knob
Forcing open a door, the engine compartment, or the trunk lid
Opening the hood by operating the hood release handle
Placing the ignition in the ON position without starting the engine
With the intrusion sensor: the intrusion sensor detects a movement in the vehicle

The system will be triggered again (up t o 10 times) if one of the above condition s remains. The trunk lid will not open when the vehicle security alarm system is activated.
If the battery becomes depleted while the vehicle security alarm system is armed, the siren will activate, and the hazard warning lights will flash during the battery charging or replacement process.

How To Arm The System

Close the windows and the convertible top.
Place the ignition in the OFF position.
Make sure the engine compartment , convertible top, doors, and trunk lid are closed.
Push the lock button on the key fob, or lock the driver’s door from the outside with the emergency key. The hazard warning lights will flash once. With The Advanced Keyless Entry function: push a request switch. The warning light in the instrument cluster display flashes twice per second for 20 seconds. After 20 seconds the system is fully armed.

The vehicle security alarm system can also be armed by activating the auto re-lock func-tion with all the doors, the trunk lid and the engine compartment closed.
The system will disarm if one of the following operations takes place within 20 seconds after pushing the lock button: To rearm the system, perform the arming procedure again:

Unlocking any door
Opening any door
Opening the engine compartment
Placing the ignition in the ON position

When the doors are locked by pushing the lock button on the key fob, or using the emergency key, the hazard warning lights will flash once to indicate that the vehicle security alarm system is armed.

NOTE:

If any door or trunk lid remains closed for 30 seconds, the doors, and trunk lid automatically re-lock, and the vehicle security alarm system arms even if a window opens or the convertible top is left down.
To reactivate the intrusion sensor, turn off the armed vehicle security alarm system and then rearm it.
The intrusion sensor is operational when the vehicle security alarm system is armed. To cancel the intrusion sensor , push the intrusion sensor cancel button each time the vehicle security alar m system is armed.

To Turn Off An Armed System
An armed system can be turned off using an y one of the following methods:

Pushing the unlock button on the key fob.
Starting the engine with the START/STOP ignition button.
With The Advanced Keyless Entry function: pushing a request switch on the exterior door handles.

NOTE:
When the doors are unlocked by pushing the unlock button on the key fob, the hazard warning lights will flash twice to indicate that the system is turned off.

To Stop The Alarm
A triggered alarm can be turned off using an y one of the following methods:

Pushing the unlock button on the key fob.
Starting the engine with the START/STOP ignition button.
With The Advanced Keyless Entry function: pushing a request switch on the exterior door handles or the electric trunk release while the key fob is being carried.

The hazard warning lights will flash twice.

FAQs

Does the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider include an alarm system that is pre-installed?

Yes, an alarm system is factory-installed in the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider for added security.

How can I set my Fiat 124 Spider’s alarm system to “arm”?

Simply lock the car with the key fob or the driver’s door key to activate the alarm system.

What functionalities are available with the alarm system?

A perimeter alarm and an anti-theft system are also included in the alarm system. It will activate if an unauthorized person tries to open a door or the trunk.

Can I adjust the alarm system’s sensitivity?

In the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider, the alarm system’s sensitivity cannot be adjusted.

Does the key fob have a panic button that can be pressed to sound the alarm in an emergency?

Yes, the key fob has a panic button that can be used to start the alarm in an emergency.

What occurs when the alarm is set off?

The vehicle’s lights will flash and the horn will blast when the alarm goes off to warn other drivers.

How can I turn off the alarm?

Simply unlock the car using the key fob or the driver’s door key to turn off the alarm.

Can the alarm system be temporarily disabled to prevent unintentional triggering?

The alarm system cannot be briefly disabled. It is intended to offer constant security.

If I leave my pet in the car, will the alarm go off?

The alarm should not go off because a pet is inside the car because it is meant to detect illicit access or manipulation.

Can I upgrade the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider with additional aftermarket security features?

Yes, you can add more aftermarket security features, but make sure to seek professional advice to prevent conflict with the alarm system that was pre-installed.

What should I do if my alarm continues going off for no apparent reason?

You should get the alarm system checked by a skilled technician or a Fiat dealership if it keeps sounding off regularly without a valid reason.

Is the vehicle’s warranty valid for the alarm system?

Yes, the warranty for the car usually includes coverage for the alarm system. For further information, consult your warranty documentation.

Can I purchase an additional key fob for the alarm system?

Yes, a Fiat dealership or approved service facility can provide you with a spare key fob.

What should I do if I misplace the key fob that controls the alarm system remotely?

To safeguard the security of your car if you lose your key fob, get in touch with a Fiat dealership right once to have it replaced and reprogrammed.

Can a mobile app be coupled with the alarm system to allow for remote monitoring and control?

The alarm system may not be natively integrated with a mobile app in the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider. You might take into account aftermarket controls and monitoring options.

Useful Links

View full PDF: 2020 Fiat 124 Spider User Manual
2020 Fiat 124 Spider Seats Setup Instructions

Tags Alarm System, Fiat, Fiat 124 Spider, Fiat 2020

Fiat

2020 Fiat 124 Spider Seats Setup Instructions

A sporty and fashionable convertible that provides a fun and open-air driving experience is the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider. Its well-designed seat configuration is one of the important elements that improves the overall driving experience. The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider’s interior is skillfully designed to offer its occupants both comfort and performance. The seating configuration of this legendary Italian roadster ensures that you are not only comfortable but also securely in charge of the vehicle whether you are traveling along gorgeous motorways or tackling twisty roads. The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider is a real representation of traditional European style, and we will examine the many components of the seating configuration, including their design, materials, and features, in this introduction.

The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider doesn’t fall short in terms of comfort and flexibility. Multiple adjustments are built into both the driver’s and passenger’s seats to accommodate various body types and tastes. This makes it possible for everyone to have a comfortable ride and choose their optimum driving posture. The seats also have heating components, which may be a wonderful blessing on chilly days when you want to enjoy driving with the top down. The Abarth trim of the 124 Spider offers even more performance-oriented seats for people who like a little bit more thrill. With their sporty style and Abarth logo, these sportier seats not only look great but also offer extra lateral support for an exhilarating driving experience. In conclusion, the seating arrangement of the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider is proof that traditional Italian design and contemporary comfort can coexist harmoniously. Whether you’re enjoying a leisurely drive along the coast or navigating winding mountain roads, they offer a combination of sportiness, luxury, and adaptability that ensures a fun and interesting driving experience. The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider delivers an outstanding open-air driving experience with its well-designed seats.

SEATS

Manual Adjustment

Forward / Rearward
To move the seat forward or rearward, pull the adjustment bar. Release the bar once the desired position is reached. Using body pres-sure, move forward and rearward on the sea t to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.

Manual Seat Adjustment

Adjustment Bar
Height Dial
Recline Lever

Height
To adjust the height for front edge of the seat bottom, rotate the dial to the desired position.

Seat Recline
To recline the seatback, lift up the recline lever and lean back until the desired position has been reached, then release the lever. Make sure the lever returns to its original position and the seatback is locked in plac e by attempting to push it forward and rear-ward.

WARNING

Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision yo u could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.

Heated Seats
On some models, the front driver an d passenger seats may be equipped wit h heaters in both the seat cushions and seat-backs. The controls for the front heated seat s are located on the center instrument panel below the climate controls. The heated seats have three settings: High, Medium, and Low. Push the switch once t o turn the heated seats on High, twice for Medium, and three times for Low. Pushing the switch a fourth time will turn the heated seat off.

NOTE:

If the ignition is placed in the OFF position while the seat warmer is operating (High , Mid or Low), and then cycled ON again , the seat warmer will automatically operate at the temperature set before the engine was turned off.
Use the seat warmer when the engine is running. Leaving the seat warmer on for long periods with the engine not running could deplete the battery.
The temperature of the seat warmer cannot be adjusted beyond High, Medium and Low.
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes.

Heated Seat Switches

WARNING

Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-tion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This ma y cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increase d surface temperature of the seat.

CAUTION
Do not use organic solvents to clean the seat. It may damage the seat surface an d the heater.

FAQs

The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider has how many seats?

A convertible two-seater, the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider has two seats.

The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider’s seats can they be adjusted?

Yes, the location and comfort of the driver and passenger seats can be adjusted.

What kind of fabric is used to cover the seats?

The standard seats are covered with luxurious fabric. As an upgrade, leather seats are offered.

In the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider, are the seats heated?

The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider comes with heated seats as an option on various model levels.

Is this model available with power-adjustable seats?

Although they are not a standard feature, power-adjustable seats are an option on some model levels.

Are there lumbar supports on the seats?

For enhanced comfort, some trim levels come with power-adjustable lumbar support.

What kind of legroom does the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider offer?

Due to its tiny size, the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider has a little amount of legroom. Although the exact measurements vary, taller people may find it uncomfortable.

Are the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider’s seats cozy for lengthy trips?

Although the seats are comfy, shorter people might find long rides more bearable due to the restricted legroom.

Can you recline the seats?

The driver’s and passenger’s seats in the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider can normally be reclined manually.

Exist any options for sportier seats?

Sport seats may be available in some trim levels, which are made to provide better support during enthusiastic driving.

In the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider, is there a back seat?

The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider does not have rear seats; it is a two-seat convertible.

Does the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider have child seat anchors?

Due to the absence of rear seats, the car is not intended for kid seats in the back.

Can the chairs be lowered to make extra room for storage?

The back structure of the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider is fixed, and the rear seats cannot be folded to add more storage capacity.

Are there any unique aspects of the seat configuration?

For a more opulent feel, some trim levels could have quality upholstery and stitching accents.

What 2020 Fiat 124 Spider seat-related safety features are there?

The car is outfitted with standard safety equipment like airbags, seat belts, and stability control to assure passenger safety even if the seats do not itself have any unique safety characteristics.

Useful Links

View full PDF: 2020 Fiat 124 Spider User Manual
2020 Fiat 124 Spider Lights and Wipers Quick Guide

Tags Fiat, Fiat 124 Spider, Fiat 2020, Seats

Fiat

2020 Fiat 124 Spider Lights and Wipers Quick Guide

A seductive fusion of Italian design and open-air driving pleasure is the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider. It is a noteworthy option in the roadster sector thanks to its lights and wipers, which are essential in improving both the car’s appearance and safety. The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider is outfitted with technologies that not only illuminate the road ahead but also ensure visibility in a variety of weather conditions, from its sleek and expressive lighting to its effective wiper system. We’ll get into the beautiful lighting features and effective wipers that give the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider a really fascinating and secure driving experience in this introduction. The lights on the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider are evidence of its alluring appearance and meticulous attention to detail. LED headlights at the front provide clear, brilliant lighting for the road while also giving the car’s look a touch of modernity. These headlights ensure that safety and style are at the heart of this roadster’s design and offer great vision, particularly during nighttime rides.

Rear-facing LED taillights not only create a distinct and identifiable rear profile, but they also improve visibility for cars behind you, making your presence on the road obvious. The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider also has LED daytime running lights, which add to the vehicle’s sporty design and enhance visibility in the daylight. The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider’s wiper system has rain-sensing wipers, which are able to detect precipitation and modify their speed accordingly. This entails that while the car takes care of keeping your windshield clear during unforeseen rains, you can concentrate on enjoying the open-air driving experience. In conclusion, the lights and wipers on the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider combine fashion and utility. A safe and secure driving experience is guaranteed by the fashionable LED lighting, which also improve the car’s looks. This roadster is fitted with cutting-edge rain-sensing wipers to handle a variety of weather scenarios, allowing you to enjoy driving with the top down while knowing that you’re prepared for whatever comes your way.

EXTERIOR LIGHTS

Headlights
The exterior light controls are located on the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering wheel. Rotate the headlight switch to activate/deactivate the headlights, other exterior lights and instrument panel illumi-nation.
When the lights are turned on, the indi-cator in the instrument cluster will illumi-nate.

Multifunction Lever

Headlight Switch
Fog Light Switch

NOTE:
To prevent the battery from depleting, do no t leave the lights on while the engine is off.

Headlight Operation

Without Auto-Light Control

Switch Position	OFF		Daytime Running Lights		High Beams
Ignition Position	ON	ACC Or OFF	ON	ACC Or OFF	ON	ACC Or OFF
Headlights	Off	Off	Off	Off	On	Off
Daytime Running Lights	On	Off	Off	Off	Off	Off
Tail Lights / Position Lights / License Plate Lights / Instrument Panel Illumination	Off	Off	On	On	On	On (*)

With Auto-Light Control

Switch Position	OFF		AUTO		Daytime Running Lights		High Beams
Ignition Position	ON	ACC Or OFF	ON	ACC Or OFF	ON	ACC Or OFF	ON	ACC Or OFF
Headlights	Off	Off	Auto (*)	Off	Off	Off	On	Off
Daytime Running Lights	On	Off	Auto (*)	Off	Off	Off	Off	Off
Tail Lights / Position Lights / License Plate Lights / Instrument Panel Illumination	Off	Off	Auto	On ()/ Off (*)	On	On	On	On (****)

The headlights and other light settings adjust automatically depending on the surrounding brightness detected by the sensor.
While the lights are turned on, they will remain on even if the ignition is cycled to a position other than ON. If the driver’s door is opened, or 30 seconds have elapse d with the lights turned on, the lights turn off.
When the ignition is placed in a position other than ON, the lights will not turn on even if the headlight switch is turned to AUTO.
If the driver’s door is opened, or 30 seconds have elapsed with the lights turned on, the lights turn off.

Daytime Running Lights (DRLs)
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) turn on automatically when the vehicle start s moving.
They turn off when the parking brake is engaged or the gear selector is shifted to the PARK position (if equipped with automatic transmission).

NOTE:

In some markets, the daytime running lights can be deactivated. Refer to “Settings” in “Multimedia” in the User Guide for more information.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights may deactivate, or reduce intensity , on one side of the vehicle (when a tur n signal is activated on that side), or on bot h sides of the vehicle (when the hazard warning lights are activated).

High Beams
The headlights can be switched between high and low beams by pushing the headlight switch lever forward for high beams, and pulling the lever rearward to return to low beams.
When the headlight high beams are on, thehigh beam indicator is illuminated in the instrument cluster display.

Flash To Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by partially pulling the headlight lever toward the steering wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to turn o n until the lever is released.
The high beam indicator in the instrument cluster display illuminates while the high beams are active.

Automatic Lighting
When the headlight switch is in the AUTO position and the ignition is placed in the O N position, the light sensor will detect the surrounding light levels and automatically turns the headlights, other exterior lights an d dashboard illumination on or off.

NOTE:
Do not shade the light sensor by placing a sticker or a label on the windshield. Other-wise, the light sensor will not operate correctly.

Light Sensor
The light sensor also works as a rain sensor for the auto-wiper control. Keep hands an d scrapers clear of the windshield when the wiper lever is in the AUTO position and the ignition is placed in the ON position, as fingers could be pinched or the wipers and wiper blades damaged when the wipers activate automatically. When cleaning the wind-shield, be sure the wipers are turned off completely when the engine is running.

NOTE:

The headlights, other exterior lights an d instrument panel lights may not turn of f immediately even if the surrounding are a becomes well-lit. This is because the light sensor determines that it is night time if the surrounding area is continuously dark for several minutes such as inside long tunnels, traffic jams inside tunnels, or i n indoor parking lots. In this case, the light s turn off if the light switch is turned to the OFF position.
When the headlight switch is in the AUTO position and the ignition is placed in the ACC or OFF position, the headlights, other exterior lights, and dashboard illumination will turn off.
The dashboard lights can be adjusted by rotating the knob in the instrument cluster display. The day/night mode can b e changed by rotating the knob until a bee p sound is heard.
The sensitivity of the automatic lights may be changed by an authorized dealer.

Follow Me Home
The Follow Me Home Light System turns on the headlights (low beams) for a period of time after the ignition is placed in the OFF position.

System Activation
With the ignition placed in the ACC or OFF position, pull the headlight control lever rear-ward and the low beam headlights will turn on. The headlights turn off after a period of time after all doors are closed.
The time until the headlights turn off after all of the doors are closed can be changed through the Connect system. The headlights turn off if the lever is pulled again while the headlights are on, or after three minutes of no further action after the first pull of the lever.

Front Fog Lights
The front fog light can be activated when the ignition is in the ON position and the head-lights or parking lights are on.

Activation
Turn the headlight switch to the orposition.
Rotate the fog light switch to the position.

Headlight Switch

Headlight Switch
Fog Light Switch

Thefog light indicator in the instrument cluster illuminates while the front fog lights are on.

Deactivation
Perform one of the following operations to turn off the front fog lights:

Rotate the fog light switch to the OFF position.
Turn the headlight switch to the OFF position.
Place the ignition in a position other than ON.

Thefog light indicator in the instrument cluster goes off when the front fog light is turned off.

With Auto-Light Control
When the fog light switch is in the position and the headlight switch is in AUTO position, the front fog lights will stay on.

Turn Signals
The ignition must be in the ON position to use the turn signals and lane change assist.
Move the signal lever down (for a left turn) o r up (for a right turn). The signal will self-cancel after the turn is completed.
If the indicator light continues to flash after a turn, manually return the lever to its orig-inal position.
The turn signal indicators in the instrument cluster display will flash according to the operation of the turn signal lever to show which signal is active.

NOTE:
If an indicator light stays on without flashing or if it flashes abnormally, one of the tur n signal bulbs may be burned out.

Lane Change Assist
Move the lever halfway toward the direction of the lane change (until the indicator flashes), and hold it there. It will return t o the off position when released.

Three-Flash Turn Signal
After releasing the turn signal lever, the tur n signal indicator flashes three times.
The operation can be cancelled by moving the lever in the direction opposite to which it was operated.
The three-flash turn signal function can be turned on or off using the personalization function in the radio.

Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS) — If Equipped
This system directs the main headlight beams and adapts it to the driving condition s around bends and turns, continuously an d automatically.
The system directs the headlight beam to illuminate the road in the best way, takin g into account the speed of the vehicle, the bend or corner angle and the speed of steering. The Adaptive Front Lighting System is automatically activated when the vehicle is started.

Leaving Home Light System
The Leaving Home Light System turns the headlights on when the unlock button on the key fob is pushed while away from the vehicle.

Activation
With the ignition in the OFF position, and the headlight switch is in theorposition , the headlights will illuminate when the unlock button on the key fob is pushed, an d the vehicle receives the signal.
The headlights turn off after 30 seconds. The following lights turn on when the Leaving Home Light System is operated: lo w beams/parking lights/tail lights/license plat e lights.

Operation of the Leaving Home Light System can be turned on or off through the Connect system.
When the lock button on the key fob is pushed, and the vehicle receives the signal, the headlights turn off.
When the headlight switch is in a position other thanor, the headlights tur n off.

Headlamp Leveling System — If Equipped
On some models, the angle of the headlight s will be automatically adjusted when turning on the headlights.

Adjusting The Headlight When Abroad
Dipped headlights are adjusted for driving i n the country where the vehicle was originall y purchased.
When traveling in countries with opposit e driving direction, to avoid flashing the driver s on the other side of the road, you need t o cover areas of the headlight. For this opera-tion contact an authorized dealer.

WINDSHIELD WIPERS / WASHER

Windshield Wipers And Washer
The windshield wiper/washer lever is locate d on the right side of the steering wheel. The ignition must be in the ON position before using these features.

Windshield Wipers
Activate the windshield wipers by pushing the wiper lever up or down.

With Intermittent Wiper
Set the lever to the intermittent position and choose the interval timing by rotating the center switch.

Switch positions:

MIST: operation while pushing the lever upward
OFF: stop
or INT: intermittent operation
or LO: low speed operation
or HI: high speed operation

With Auto-Wiper Control
When the wiper lever is in the AUTO position, the rain sensor will sense the amount of rain-fall on the windshield and turns the wipers on or off automatically (off/intermittent/lo w speed/high speed).

Switch positions:

MIST: operation while pulling up lever
OFF: stop
AUTO: auto control operation
or LO: low speed operation
or HI: high speed operation

Adjusting Rain Sensor Sensitivity
The sensitivity of the rain sensor can b e adjusted by rotating the switch on the wiper lever.
From the center position (normal), rotate the switch downward for higher sensitivity (+ )(faster response) or rotate it upward for les s sensitivity (-) (slower response).

Rain Sensor Adjustment

NOTE:
Do not shade the rain sensor by placing a sticker or a label on the windshield. Other-wise the rain sensor will not operate correctly.
When the wiper lever is in the AUTO position and the ignition is placed in the ON position, the wipers may move automatically in the following cases:

If the windshield above the rain sensor is touched or wiped with a cloth
If the windshield is struck with a hand or other object from either outside or inside the vehicle

WARNING
Keep hands and scrapers clear of the windshield when the wiper lever is in the AUTO position and the ignition is cycle d ON, as fingers could be pinched or the wipers and wiper blades damaged when the wipers activate automatically.

If the windshield is going to be cleaned, b e sure the wipers are turned off. This i s important when clearing ice and snow. Turning the auto-wiper lever from the OFF t o the AUTO position while driving activates th e windshield wipers once, after which the y operate according to the rainfall amount. The auto-wiper control may not operate when the rain sensor temperature is about 14° F (–10°C) or lower, or about 185°F (85°C) o r higher. If the windshield is coated with water repel-lent, the rain sensor may not be able to sense the amount of rainfall correctly an d auto-wiper control may not operate properly.
If dirt or debris (such as ice or debris containing salt water) adheres to the wind-shield above the rain sensor or if the wind-shield is iced, it could cause the wipers t o move automatically.
However, if the wipers cannot remove this ice, dirt or debris, the auto-wiper control will stop operation. In this case, set the wiper lever to the low speed position or high speed position for manual operation, or remove the ice, dirt or debris by hand to restore the auto-wiper operation. If the auto-wiper lever is left in the AUTO position, the wipers could operate automati-cally from the effect of strong light sources, electromagnetic waves, or infrared light because the rain sensor uses an optical sensor. It is recommended that the auto-wiper lever be turned to the OFF position other than when driving the vehicle under rainy condi-tions. The auto-wiper control functions can b e turned off.

Windshield Washer
Pull the wiper/washer lever rearward an d hold it to spray washer fluid onto the wind-shield.
With the wiper lever in the OFF, intermittent, or AUTO position, the wipers will operate continuously until the lever is released.

WARNING
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. Yo u might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, war m the windshield with defroster before an d during windshield washer use.

If the fluid level is normal and the washer does not work, contact an authorized dealer.

Windshield Washer Nozzles

FAQs

How can I switch on my 2020 Fiat 124 Spider’s headlights?

Simply turn the headlight switch to the chosen position (Auto, On, Off, or Parking Lights) on the left side of the steering column to turn on the headlights.

Is the brightness of the lights on the instrument panel adjustable?

Yes, using the dimmer control on the left side of the instrument cluster, you can change the brightness of the instrument panel lights.

How can I turn on my high beam headlights?

Pushing the headlight switch in the opposite direction will turn on the high lights. To convert to low beams, pull it back.

The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) serve what purpose?

DRLs are made to make your car more visible while driving in the daytime. When the engine is running, they automatically come on.

How do I operate my Fiat 124 Spider’s windshield wipers?

Utilize the wiper stalk located on the steering column’s right side. For a single wipe, push it up; for intermittent, low, or high-speed wiper settings, swivel the collar.

How do I turn on the wiper for the back windshield?

To activate the rear wiper, rotate the wiper stalk’s tip upward. Push it down to wipe the back windshield and spray washer fluid.

What must I do if the wipers are malfunctioning?

Check the wiper fuse first if the wipers are not functioning as they should. If everything is good, a motor or linkage problem may be the cause, therefore you should speak with a Fiat service shop.

Can I change the rain-sensing wipers’ sensitivity?

Yes, rain-sensing wipers are included with the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider. By adjusting the sensitivity control dial on the wiper stalk, you can modify their sensitivity.

How do I turn on the fluid spray for the windshield washers?

To get a quick spray of washer fluid to clear the windshield, pull the wiper stalk in your direction. To get a constant spray, hold it.

When the car is off, can I use the wipers?

The Fiat 124 Spider’s wipers cannot be used without the ignition being in the “ON” or “ACC” state.

How can I fix streaks or improper cleaning of my wiper blades?

If the wiper blades are streaking or not cleaning properly, replace them. Upgraded wiper blades can significantly increase visibility.

Can the automated headlight feature be turned off?

Yes, you may turn off the automated headlight feature by turning the headlight switch to the “Off” position.

What does the headlight switch’s fog light symbol signify?

When vision is impeded by fog or heavy rain, the fog lights icon enables you to turn them on.

How do I operate the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider’s turn signals?

The stalk on the left side of the steering column is used to operate the turn signals. To indicate a turn, push it up for a right turn and down for a left turn.

Am I able to replace the headlight and taillight bulbs myself?

Although changing bulbs is doable, it is advised to have a Fiat service center or a qualified technician replace them to guarantee proper installation and alignment.

Useful Links

View full PDF: 2020 Fiat 124 Spider User Manual
2020 Fiat 124 Spider Instrument Panel Guide

Tags Fiat, Fiat 124 Spider, Fiat 2020, Lights and Wipers

Fiat

2020 Fiat 124 Spider Instrument Panel Guide

The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider is a sporty convertible car that looks great and feels much better to drive. The dashboard of this extraordinary car welcomes you as soon as you enter the interior and skillfully combines contemporary technology with an homage to traditional Italian automotive aesthetics. The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider’s instrument panel is evidence of the company’s dedication to developing a really engaging driving experience. This panel’s tasteful integration of analog and digital components not only gives the driver vital information, but also improves the interior’s overall aesthetic appeal. This introduction will highlight the main characteristics and design cues of the instrument panel in the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider. The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider’s instrument panel is a masterfully created work of art that puts the driver in the spotlight. A prominent set of analog gauges, including a sizable speedometer and tachometer, are at the center of the vehicle and feature a timeless look reminiscent of vintage sports vehicles.

In addition to paying homage to vintage roadsters, these analog instruments also give the driver a physical connection to the car, immersing you in the driving experience. A contemporary, user-friendly infotainment system that perfectly merges with the instrument panel serves as a complement to the analog gauges. The touchscreen infotainment display, which is located in the middle, provides access to a number of cutting-edge amenities, including as smartphone connectivity, music streaming, and navigation. This combination of traditional and modern design concepts strikes the perfect balance between innovation and tradition, giving you the best of both worlds. In conclusion, the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider’s instrument panel skillfully blends the past and present, capturing the spirit of Italian sports vehicle design while embracing modern technology and comfort. This convertible’s overall attractiveness is greatly enhanced by it, making each drive an exciting one.

CONTROL PANEL AND INSTRUMENTS

Instrument Cluster

Abarth Instrument Cluster

Odometer/Trip Computer And Trip Computer Button/Dashboard Illumination
Tachometer
Speedometer
Automatic Transmission Info Display
Odometer/Trip Computer Info/Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge/Fuel Gauge/Outside Temperature/Cruise Control/Info Switch Display

Instrument Cluster

Odometer/Trip Computer And Trip Computer Button/Dashboard Illumination
Tachometer
Speedometer
Automatic Transmission Info Display
Odometer/Trip Computer Info/Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge/Fuel Gauge/Outside Temperature/Cruise Control/Info Switch Display

Odometer/Trip Computer
The display mode can be changed from odometer to “Trip computer A” to “Tri p computer B” and then back to odometer by pushing the selector.
The selected mode will be displayed.

Abarth Odometer/Trip Reset Button

Odometer/Trip Reset Button

Odometer/Trip Reset Button

Odometer/Trip Reset Button

Odometer
The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

Trip Computer
The trip computer can record the total distance of two trips. One is recorded in “Trip A”, and the other is recorded in “Trip B”. For instance, “Trip A” can record the distance from the point of origin, and “Trip B” can record the distance from where the fuel tank is filled. When “Trip A” is selected, pushing the selector again within one second will change to “Trip B” mode. When “Trip A” is selected, TRIP A will be displayed. When “Trip B” is selected, TRIP B will be displayed. The trip computer records the total distance the vehicle is driven until the meter is reset. Return it to “0.0” by depressing and holding the selector for one second or more. Use this meter to measure trip distances an d to compute fuel consumption.

NOTE:
Only the trip records tenths of miles (kilome-ters).

Trip Computer Reset
The trip computer will be erased when:

The power supply is interrupted (blow n fuse or the battery is disconnected).
The vehicle is driven over 9999.9 miles.

Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the speed of th e vehicle.

Instrument Panel Illumination
When the position lights are turned on wit h the ignition switched ON, the brightness o f the instrument panel illumination is dimmed. When the position lights are turne d on, the warning light in the instrumen t cluster illuminates. See “Exterior Lights” i n “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” chapter.

Brightness Adjustment
The brightness of the instrument panel an d dashboard illuminations can be adjusted b y rotating the knob:

The brightness decreases by rotating the knob to the left. A beep will be heard when the knob has been rotated to the maximum dim position.
The brightness increases by rotating the knob to the right.

Abarth Dimmer Knob

Instrument Cluster Illumination Dim-mer Knob

Dimmer Knob

Instrument Cluster Illumination Dimmer Knob

Canceling Illumination Dimmer
With the ignition ON, rotate the knob to the right until a beep sounds while the instru-ment cluster is dimmed. If the instrument cluster’s visibility is reduced due to glare from surrounding brightness, cancel the illu-mination dimmer. When the illumination dimmer is canceled, the instrument cluster cannot be dimmed even if the position lights are turned on. When the illumination dimmer is canceled, the screen in the center display switches t o constant display of the daytime screen.

Trip Computer And Info Switch
The following information can be selected b y pushing the INFO switch with the ignition i n the ON position:

Distance-to-empty (approximate distance you can travel on the available fuel)
Average fuel economy
Current fuel economy
Average vehicle speed
Vehicle speed alarm — If Equipped

If you have any problems with your tri p computer, contact an authorized dealer.

Instrument Cluster Display Controls

Distance-To-Empty Mode
This mode displays the approximate distanc e you can travel on the remaining fuel base d on the fuel economy.
The distance-to-empty will be calculated an d displayed every second.

Distance To Empty Display Screen

NOTE:

Even though the distance-to-empty display may indicate a sufficient amount of remaining driving distance before refueling is required, refuel as soon a s possible if the fuel level is very low or the low fuel warning light illuminates.
The display may not change unless yo u add more than approximately 2.3 gallon s (9 liters) of fuel.
The distance-to-empty is the approximate remaining distance the vehicle can b e driven until all the graduation marks in the fuel gauge (indicating the remaining fuel supply) disappear.
If there is no past fuel economy information such as after first purchasing you r vehicle or the information is deleted when the battery cables are disconnected, the actual distance-to empty/range may differ from the amount indicated.

Average Fuel Economy Mode
This mode displays the average fuel economy by calculating the total fuel consumption and the total traveled distance since purchasing the vehicle, reconnecting the battery after disconnection, or resetting the data. The average fuel economy is calculated an d displayed every minute. To clear the dat a being displayed, push the INFO switch for more than 1.5 seconds. After pushing the INFO switch, “- – – mpg ” (“- – – L/100 km”) will be displayed for abou t one minute before the fuel economy is recal-culated and displayed.

Current Fuel Economy Mode
This mode displays the current fuel econom y by calculating the amount of fuel consump-tion and the distance traveled. Current fuel economy will be calculated and displaye d every two seconds.
When you’ve slowed to about 3 mph (5 km/h), “- – – mpg” (“- – – L/100 km”) will b e displayed.

Current Fuel Economy Display Screen

Average Vehicle Speed Mode
This mode displays the average vehicle speed by calculating the distance and the time traveled since connecting the battery o r resetting the data.
Average vehicle speed will be calculated and displayed every 10 seconds. To clear the data being displayed, push the INFO switch for more than 1.5 seconds.

Average Vehicle Speed Display Screen

After pushing the INFO switch, “- – – MPH ” (“- – – km/h”) will be displayed for about on e minute before the vehicle speed is recalculated and displayed.

Vehicle Speed Alarm Mode — If Equipped
In this mode, the current setting for the Vehicle Speed Alarm is displayed. You ca n change the set vehicle speed that will trigger the warning.

NOTE:
The vehicle speed alarm display is activate d at the same time the beep sound is heard. The set vehicle speed will flash several times. The vehicle speed alarm can be se t using the INFO switch. The vehicle spee d alarm function can be set between 18 an d 155 mph (30 and 250 km/h).

NOTE:
Always set the vehicle speed according to th e laws and regulations of the country/city i n which the vehicle is driven. In addition, always verify the speed of the vehicle usin g the speedometer.
The vehicle speed alarm can be set using the following procedure:

Press the INFO switch to display th e Vehicle Speed Alarm mode.
Press the INFO switch continuously until a beep sound is heard. The set vehicl e speed display flashes the first digit.
Press the INFO switch and set the firs t digit to the desired vehicle speed. Th e numerical value changes each time th e INFO switch is pressed.
Press the INFO switch continuously until a beep sound is heard. The set vehicl e speed display flashes the lower tw o digits.
Press the INFO switch and set the tw o lower digits to the desired vehicle speed. The numerical value changes each tim e the INFO switch is pressed.
Press the INFO switch continuously until a beep sound is heard. The set vehicl e speed is displayed on the vehicle spee d alarm screen.

Tachometer
The tachometer shows engine speed in thou-sands of revolutions per minute (rpm).
The range varies depending on the type of gauge.

Abarth Tachometer

Tachometer Display

Tachometer

Tachometer Display

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge And Fuel Gauge
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge

Fuel/Temperature Gauge

Engine Coolant Temperature
Fuel Gauge

NOTE:
If the high engine coolant temperature warning light (red) turns on, there is a possibility of overheating. Park the vehicle in a safe place immediately and take appropriate measures. If the vehicle continues to be driven, it could cause damage to the engine.

Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge shows approximately ho w much fuel is remaining in the tank when the ignition is in the ON position. We recommend keeping the tank over a quarter full.

E = Empty
F = Full

If the low fuel warning light illuminates o r the fuel level is very low, refuel as soon a s possible.

NOTE:

After refueling, it may require some time for the indicator to stabilize. In addition , the indicator may deviate while driving on a slope or curve since the fuel moves i n the tank.
The display indicating a quarter or less remaining fuel has more segments to show the remaining fuel level in greater detail.
The direction of the arrow on the fuel gauge indicates that the fuel door lid is o n the left side of the vehicle.

Outside Temperature Display
When the ignition is in the ON position, the outside temperature is displayed.

Outside Temperature Screen Display

Under the following conditions, the outside temperature display may differ from the actual outside temperature depending on the surroundings and vehicle conditions:

Significantly cold or hot temperatures.
Sudden changes in outside temperature.
The vehicle is parked.
The vehicle is driven at low speeds.

Changing The Temperature Unit Of The Outside Temperature Display
The outside temperature unit can b e switched between Fahrenheit and Celsius using the following procedure.

Vehicles With Fiat Connect 7.0
Settings can be changed through the Connect 7.0 radio screen. Refer to “Person-alization Features” in this chapter.
Settings can be changed through the Connect 7.0 radio screen. Refer to “Person-alization Features” in this chapter.

Vehicles With Fiat Radio 3.0
Proceed as follows:

Push the INFO switch with the ignition i n the OFF position and continue pushing the INFO switch for five seconds o r longer while placing the ignition in the ON position. The outside temperature display flashes.
Push the INFO switch to change the outside temperature unit.
Push and hold the INFO switch for three seconds or longer while the outside temperature display is flashing. The outside temperature display illuminates.

NOTE:
When the temperature unit indicated in the outside temperature display is changed, the temperature unit indicated in the engine coolant gauge display changes in conjunction with it.

Cruise Control Set Vehicle Speed Display
The vehicle speed preset using the cruise control is displayed.

Cruise Control Display Screen

Gear Shift Indicator — If Equipped

The gear shift indicator helps the driver obtain optimum fuel economy and smoot h driving. It displays the selected Gear Position 1 in the instrument cluster and also notifies the driver to change to the most suitable Gear Position 2 corresponding to the actual driving condition.

NOTE:
Do not rely solely on the shift-up/shift-down recommendations by indications. The actual driving situation might require shift operations different from indication. To avoid the risk of accidents, the road and traffic conditions have to be judged correctly by the driver before shifting.

Vehicles with Manual Transmission
The gear shift indicator turns off when the following operations are performed:

The vehicle is stopped
The vehicle is put in neutral
The vehicle is driven in reverse
The clutch is not fully engaged when accelerating
The clutch pedal remains depressed for two seconds or longer while driving

Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
The gear shift indicator turns off when the following operations are performed:

The vehicle is stopped
Manual shift mode is canceled

Manually Shifting Up (Versions with Automatic Transmission)
Using the selector lever: to shift up to a higher gear, tap the selector lever back + once.

FAQs

What does the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider’s instrument panel look like?

The area of the dashboard known as the instrument panel is where the driver can see crucial data including speed, fuel level, and engine temperature.

The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider has what kind of instrument panel?

A beautiful and legible analog instrument cluster with a central digital display is standard on the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider.

What data is visible on the instrument panel’s digital section?

Typical information displayed on the digital display includes journey details, the current weather, and alerts.

How can I navigate the instrument panel’s many display modes?

Usually, the steering wheel’s buttons or controls can be used to switch between several display modes.

Is it possible to alter the data shown on the instrument panel’s digital portion?

The digital display of some 2020 Fiat 124 Spider models can be adjusted to show the data you deem most significant.

On the instrument panel, how do I reset the trip odometer?

Consult your owner’s handbook for instructions on how to reset the trip odometer as each trim level may have a different process.

What are the warning lights on the instrument panel for, and what do they signify?

Low gasoline, engine temperature, low oil pressure, and check engine are some common warning lights. Their definitions are explained in depth in your owner’s handbook.

On the instrument panel, is there a tachometer?

The tachometer, which shows your engine’s revolutions per minute (RPM), is present in the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider.

How can I change the instrument panel’s nighttime brightness?

Frequently, the instrument panel has buttons or switches that can be used to change the brightness.

Where can I find the recommended tire pressure for the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider’s tires on the instrument panel?

You won’t find the recommended tire pressure on the instrument panel itself; instead, it will often be indicated on a label inside the driver’s door jamb.

Does the instrument panel have a low fuel warning light, and how does it function?

Yes, when your fuel is running low, a warning light will come on to let you know that it’s time to replenish.

What details about the audio system are shown on the instrument panel?

You can adjust audio settings and see information about the currently playing audio source, track, or station on the instrument panel.

Can I use my smartphone to make hands-free calls and play music through the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider’s instrument panel?

Yes, a lot of versions allow for the integration of smartphones for functions like hands-free calling and music control.

When a warning light appears on the instrument panel, what should I do?

If a warning light comes on, refer to your owner’s manual for instructions on what to do and what the problem is.

How can I alter the instrument panel’s design to suit my tastes?

Refer to your owner’s manual for a complete list of customization choices for the instrument panel’s appearance since they may change based on the trim level.

Useful Links

View full PDF: 2020 Fiat 124 Spider User Manual
2020 Fiat 124 Spider Warning and indicator Lights Guide

Tags Fiat, Fiat 124 Spider, Fiat 2020, Instrument panel

Fiat

2020 Fiat 124 Spider Warning and indicator Lights Guide

The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider is a sporty convertible car that combines Italian engineering with an exhilarating driving experience. It is svelte and fashionable. The vehicle’s assortment of warning and indication lights is one of its key characteristics. These lights act as an essential means of communication between you and your car, keeping you updated on its condition and any potential problems.

In this introduction, we’ll look at the warning and indicator lights found on the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider, explaining what they do and how important it is that they function properly to keep you safe and get the most out of this amazing roadster. These lights will direct you on your trip from the minute you touch the ignition key, warning you of everything from minor maintenance requirements to more serious issues that need quick care. It will be easier for you to have a worry-free and thrilling driving experience with your 2020 Fiat 124 Spider if you comprehend their meanings and reactions.

WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES

Warning Lights And Messages

NOTE:

The warning light in the instrument panel appears together with a dedicate d message and/or acoustic signal whe n applicable. These indications are indica-tive and precautionary and as such mus t not be considered as exhaustive and/o r alternative to the information contained i n the Owner’s Manual, which you ar e advised to read carefully in all cases . Always refer to the information in thi s chapter in the event of a failure indication.
Failure indications displayed are divide d into two categories: serious and les s serious failures. Serious failures are indi-cated by a repeated and prolonged warning “cycle”. Less serious failures ar e indicated by a warning “cycle” with a shorter duration. The display cycle of bot h categories can be interrupted. The instru-ment panel warning light will stay on until the cause of the failure is eliminated.

Vehicles With Fiat Connect 7.0
The warning contents can be verified on the audio system.

Proceed as follows:

If the warning light is turned on, select icon on the home screen to display the application screen.
Select “Vehicle Status Monitor”
Select “Warning Guidance” to display the current warnings.
Select the applicable warning to view the warning details.

For the following warning/indicator lights:

Master Warning Light
Brake System Warning Light
ABS Warning Light
Charging System Warning Light
Engine Oil Warning Light
Electric Throttle Warning Light
Cold Start Warning Light
Check Engine Warning Light
Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Automatic Transmission Warning Light
Power Steering Malfunction Indicator Light
Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning Light
Check Fuel Cap Warning Light
Low Fuel Warning Light
Seat Belt Warning Light
Door Ajar Warning Light
Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
KEY Warning Light
LED Headlight KEY Warning Light
BSM (Blind Spot Monitoring) OFF Indicator Light
Traction Control System (TCS)/Dynamic
Stability Control (DSC) Indicator Light
DSC OFF Indicator Light
Security Indicator Light
Indicator Light
Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Warning Light

The light turns on when the ignition i s switched on for an operation check, an d turns off a few seconds later or when th e engine is started. If the light does not turn o n or remains turned on, have the vehicl e inspected at an authorized dealer.

NOTE:
Only for “Brake System Warning Light:” th e light turns on continuously when the parkin g brake is applied.

Red Warning Lights

Warning Light

What It Means

Parking Brake Warning – Warning Light Inspection/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning

Parking Brake Warning / Warning Light Inspection

The light illuminates when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switched to START or ON. It turns off when the parking brake is fully released.

Low Brake Fluid Level Warning

If the brake warning light remains illuminated even though the parking brake is released, the brake fluid may be low or there could be a problem with the brake system. Park the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact an authorized dealer.

NOTE:

o Do not drive with the brake system warning light illuminated. Contact an authorized dealer to have the brakes inspected as soon as possible. Driving with the brake system warning light illuminated is dangerous. It indicates that your brakes may not work at all or that they could completely fail at any time. If this light remains illuminated, after checking that the parking brake is fully released, have the brakes inspected immediately.

o The effectiveness of the braking may diminish so you may need to push the brake pedal more strongly than normal to stop the vehicle.

Stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact an authorized dealer.

Warning Light

What It Means

Electronic Brake-Force Distribution (EBD) System Warning
If the EBD (Electronic Brake-force Distribution) control unit determines that some components are operating incorrectly, the control unit may illuminate the brake system warning light and the Anti Lock Brake System (ABS) warning light simultaneously. The problem is likely to be the electronic brake force distribution system. Stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact an authorized dealer.

NOTE:

o Do not drive with both the ABS warning light and brake warning light illuminated. Contact an authorized dealer to have the brakes inspected as soon as possible. Driving when the brake system warning light and ABS warning light are illuminated simultaneously is dangerous.

o When both lights are illuminated, the rear wheels could lock more quickly in an emergency stop than under normal circumstances.

Alternator Failure
If the warning light illuminates while driving, it indicates a malfunction of the alternator or of the charging system. Drive to the side of the road and park off the right-of-way. Stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact an authorized dealer.

NOTE:
Do not continue driving when the charging system warning light is illuminated because the engine could stop unexpect- edly.

Warning Light

What It Means

Low Engine Oil Pressure
This warning light indicates low engine oil pressure.

NOTE:
Do not run the engine if the oil pressure is low. Otherwise, it could result in extensive engine damage. If the light illuminates or the warning indication is displayed while driving:

1. Drive to the side of the road and park off the right-of-way on level ground.

2. Turn off the engine and wait five minutes for the oil to drain back into the sump.

3. Inspect the engine oil level. If it’s low, add the appropriate amount of engine oil while being careful not to overfill.

4. Start the engine and check the warning light.

NOTE:
Do not run the engine if the oil level is low. Otherwise, it could result in extensive engine damage.
If the light remains illuminated even though the oil level is normal or after adding oil, stop the engine immediately and contact an authorized dealer.

Door-Open Warning Light
The light turns on if any door is not closed securely. Close the door securely.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.

Warning Light

What It Means

High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
The light flashes when the engine coolant temperature is extremely high, and illuminates when the engine coolant temperature increases further.

Handling Procedure

o Flashing Light: drive slowly to reduce engine load until you can find a safe place to stop the vehicle and wait for the engine to cool down.

o Illuminated Light: this indicates the possibility of overheating. Park the vehicle in a safe place immediately and stop the engine. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information.

NOTE:
Do not drive the vehicle with the high engine coolant temperature warning light illuminated. Otherwise, it could result in damage to the engine. Contact an authorized dealer.

Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning

A system malfunction is indicated if the warning light constantly flashes, constantly illuminates or does not illuminate at all when the ignition is placed in the ON position. If any of these occur, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The system may not operate in an accident.

Warning Light	What It Means
	Key Warning Light — Illuminated If any malfunction occurs in the keyless entry system, it illuminates continuously. NOTE: If the key warning indicator light illuminates or the push button start indicator light (amber) flashes, the engine may not start. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
	Key Warning Light — Flashing Advanced Key Fob Malfunction Take the appropriate action and verify that the warning light turns off. o The advanced key fob battery is discharged: replace the key fob battery. o The advanced key fob is not within the operation range/is placed in areas inside the cabin where it is difficult for the key to be detected: bring the advanced key fob into the operation range. o A key fob from another manufacturer similar to the advanced key fob is in the operation range: take the key fob from another manufacturer similar to the advanced key out of the operation range. o Without the ignition switched OFF, the advanced key is taken out of the vehicle, and then all the doors are closed: bring the advanced key fob back into the vehicle. If the engine cannot be started, try starting it using the emergency operation for starting the engine, and contact an authorized dealer.
	Vehicle Security Alarm System The warning light switches on to report a failure of the vehicle security alarm system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light

What It Means

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light

If the ABS warning light stays on while you’re driving, when the ABS control unit has detected a system malfunction. If this occurs, your brakes will function normally as if the vehicle had no ABS. Should this happen contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

NOTE:

o When the engine is jump-started to charge the battery, uneven RPM occurs and the ABS warning light may illuminate. If this occurs, it is the result of the weak battery and does not indicate an ABS malfunction. Recharge the battery.

o The brake assist system does not operate while the ABS warning light is illuminated.

Malfunction Indicator Light

If this light illuminates while driving, the vehicle may have a problem. It is important to note the driving conditions when the light illuminated and contact an authorized dealer.

The malfunction indicator light may illuminate in the following cases:

o The engine’s electrical system has a problem.

o The emission control system has a problem.

o The fuel tank level is very low or approaching empty.

o The fuel-filler cap is missing or not tightened securely.

If the malfunction indicator light remains on, or it flashes continuously, do not drive at high speeds and contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, a s referenced above, can reach highe r temperatures than in normal operatin g conditions. This can cause a fire if yo u drive slowly or park over flammabl e substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in deat h or serious injury to the driver, occupants o r others.

CAUTION
Prolonged driving with the Malfunctio n Indicator Light (MIL) on could caus e damage to the engine control system. I t also could affect fuel economy an d driveability. If the MIL is flashing, sever e catalytic converter damage and power los s will soon occur. Immediate service i s required.

Warning Light

What It Means

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light — If Equipped

The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed. Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.

NOTE:

Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

CAUTION
The TPMS has been optimized for th e original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have bee n established for the tire size equipped o n your vehicle. Undesirable system operatio n or sensor damage may result when usin g replacement equipment that is not of th e same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarke t wheels can cause sensor damage. Usin g aftermarket tire sealants may cause th e Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS ) sensor to become inoperable. After usin g an aftermarket tire sealant it i s recommended that you take your vehicle t o an authorized dealer to have your senso r function checked.

Warning Light

What It Means

Power Steering Malfunction Indicator Light

The light illuminates if the electric power steering has a malfunction. If the light illuminates, stop the vehicle in a safe place and do not operate the steering wheel. There is no problem if the light turns off after a while. Contact an authorized dealer if the light illuminates continuously.

NOTE:

o If the indicator light illuminates, the power steering will not operate normally. If this happens, the steering wheel can still be operated, however, the operation may feel heavy compared to normal, or the steering wheel could vibrate when turning.

o Repeatedly jerking the steering wheel left and right while the vehicle is stopped or moving extremely slowly will cause the power steering system to go into protective mode which will make the steering feel heavy, but this does not indi- cate a problem. If this occurs, park the vehicle safely and wait several minutes for the system to return to normal.

Automatic Transmission Warning Light — If Equipped

The light illuminates when the transmission has a problem.

NOTE:

If the automatic transmission warning light illuminates, the transmission has an electrical problem. Continuing to drive your vehicle in this condition could cause damage to your transmission. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Warning Light	What It Means
	Master Warning Light Vehicles Equipped With Fiat Connect 3.0 System The warning light turns on continuously if there is a malfunction in the battery management system or there is a malfunction in the brake switch. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Vehicles Equipped With Fiat Connect 7.0 System The warning light turns on when the system has a malfunction. Operate the center display and verify the content. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
	Cold Start Disable Indicator Light When the ambient temperature is extremely low, the engine may not crank even when the engine starting procedure is performed. At this time, the Cold Start Disable Indicator light in the instrument cluster flashes. However, this does not indicate a problem. NOTE: Place your vehicle in a warm garage until the temperature has risen to a sufficient level to enable engine starting.
	Electric Throttle Control Warning Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

Warning Lights	What It Means
	LED Headlight Warning Light This light illuminates if there is a malfunction in the LED headlight. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
	Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) Off Indicator Light — If Equipped A problem in the system may be indicated under the following conditions: o The light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON position. o The light remains turned on even if the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) switch is operated. o It turns on while driving the vehicle. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. If the vehicle is driven on a road with less traffic and few vehicles that the radar sensors can detect, the system may pause (the warning light illuminates). However, it does not indicate a malfunction.
	Low Fuel Warning Light The light turns on when the remaining fuel is about 2.3 gallons (9.0 liters). The light illumination timing may vary because fuel inside the fuel tank moves around according to the driving conditions and the vehicle posture. Add fuel.
	Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Light — If Equipped This warning light indicates that little washer fluid remains. Add washer fluid.
	Cruise Control Activation — If Equipped The warning light illuminates when the cruise control system is activated.
	TCS / DSC System Indicator Light The warning light turns on when the TCS/DSC system is active. This means that the vehicle is in critical stability and grip conditions.

Warning Lights	What It Means
	DSC Off Indicator Light This indicator light stays on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched ON. It also illuminates when the DSC OFF switch is pressed and TCS/DSC is switched off. For further information regarding the DSC OFF Switch, refer to “Safety Systems” in “Safety”.
	Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light If the check fuel filler cap warning light illuminates while driving, the fuel filler cap may not be installed properly. Stop the engine and reinstall the fuel filler cap.

Green Warning Lights

Warning Light	What It Means
	Left Direction Indicator The warning light turns on when the direction indicator control lever is moved downwards or, together with the right direction indicator, when the hazard warning light button is pushed.
	Right Direction Indicator The warning light turns on when the direction indicator control lever is moved upwards or, together with the left direction indicator, when the hazard warning light button is pushed.
	Parking Lights And Normal Beam Headlights The warning light turns on when parking lights or normal beam headlights are turned on.
	Cruise Control — If Equipped The warning light turns on when a cruising speed has been set.

Warning Light

What It Means

Key Indicator Light

The warning light turns on when the engine is ready to start.

Warning Light Flashing

When the keyless START/STOP button is pushed from ON to ACC or OFF position, the warning light may flash for approximately 30 seconds indicating that the remaining battery power of the key is low. Replace with a new battery before the key becomes unusable.

Blue Warning Light

Warning Light	What It Means
	High Beam Headlights The warning light switches on when the high beam headlights are turned on.
	Low Engine Coolant Temperature Indicator Light The light illuminates continuously when the engine coolant temperature is low and turns off after the engine is warm. If the low engine coolant temperature indicator light remains illuminated after the engine has been sufficiently warmed up, the temperature sensor could have a malfunction. Contact an authorized dealer.

Warning Light (Red Color) On Dashboard Trim

Warning Light

What It Means

Seat Belt Warning Light

The seat belt warning light turns on if the driver or passengers seat is occupied and the seat belt is not fastened with the ignition placed in the ON position.
If the driver or passengers seat belt is unfastened (only when the passenger seat is occupied) and the vehicle is driven at a speed faster than about 12 mph (20 km/h), the warning light flashes. After a short time, the LED stops flashing, but remains illuminated.

If a seat belt remains unfastened, the LED flashes again for a given period of time.
If the driver or passengers seat belt is unfastened after the LED turns on, and the vehicle speed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h), the LED flashes again.

With Passenger Occupant Classification System: to allow the passenger occupant classification sensor to function properly, do not place and sit on an additional seat cushion on the passengers seat. The sensor may not function properly because the additional seat cushion could cause sensor interference.

Without Passenger Occupant Classification System: placing heavy items on the passengers seat may cause the passengers seat belt warning function to operate depending on the weight of the item. To allow the passengers seat weight sensor to function properly, do not place and sit on an additional seat cushion on the passengers seat. The sensor may not function properly because the additional seat cushion could cause sensor interference. If a small child is seated on the passengers seat, the warning light may not operate.

Fasten the seat belts.

Warning Light (Amber Color) On Instrument Cluster Trim

Warning Light	What It Means
	Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Indicator Light The light turns on when the ignition is switched on for an operation check, and turns off a few seconds later or when the engine is started. If the light does not turn on or remains turned on, contact an authorized dealer.

Message Indicated On Display — If Equipped With Fiat Connect 7.0 System Message Indicated On Display

If a message is displayed in the cente r display, take appropriate action (in a cal m manner) according to the displayed message.
If the following messages are displayed i n the center display, a vehicle system may b e malfunctioning:

Engine Coolant Temperature High: displays if the engine coolant temperature ha s increased excessively.
Charging System Malfunction: displays i f the charging system has a malfunction.
Temperature Warning: the following message is displayed when the tempera-ture around the center display is high . Lowering the temperature of the inside o f the vehicle or the temperature around th e center display by avoiding direct sunlight is recommended.

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and contac t an authorized dealer.

Warning Sound Is Activated

Lights-On Reminder
If lights are on and the ignition is placed i n the ACC position, or the ignition is placed i n the OFF position, a continuous beep soun d will be heard when the driver’s door i s opened.

NOTE:

When the ignition is placed in the ACC position, the “Ignition Not Cycled Of f Warning Beep” overrides the lights-o n reminder.
A personalized function is available to change the sound volume for the lights-o n reminder.

Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning Beep
If there is a problem with the air bag/sea t belt pretensioner systems and the warnin g light illumination, a warning beep sound will be heard for about five seconds ever y minute.
The air bag and seat belt pretensione r system warning beep sound will continue t o be heard for approximately 35 minutes . Contact an authorized dealer as soon a s possible.

CAUTION
Do not drive the vehicle with the air bag/seat belt pretensioner system warning bee p sounding. Driving the vehicle with the ai r bag/seat belt pretensioner system warnin g beep sounding is dangerous. In a collision , the air bags and the seat belt pretensione r system will not deploy and this could resul t in death or serious injury. Contact a n authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Seat Belt Warning Beep

Except Mexico
If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened when the ignition is in the ON position, a bee p sound will be heard for about six seconds.
If the driver or the passengers seat belt is no t fastened and the vehicle is driven at a speed faster than about 12 mph (20 km/h), a bee p sound will be heard again for a specified period of time.
Until a seat belt is fastened or a given period of time has elapsed, the beep sound will no t stop even if the vehicle speed falls below 12 mph (20 km/h).

NOTE

To allow the passenger occupant classification sensor to function properly, do no t place and sit on an additional seat cushion on the passengers seat. The sensor ma y not function properly because the addi-tional seat cushion could cause sensor interference.
If a small child is seated on the passengers seat, the warning beep may no t operate.

Mexico
If the vehicle speed exceeds about 12 mph (20 km/h) with the driver or passengers sea t belt unfastened, a warning beep sound s continuously. If the seat belt remains unfas-tened, the beep sound stops once and the n continues for about 90 seconds. The bee p stops after the driver or passengers seat bel t is fastened. Until a seat belt is fastened or a given period of time has elapsed, the beep sound will no t stop even if the vehicle speed falls below 12 mph (20 km/h).

WARNING

Placing heavy items on the front passenger seat may cause the front passenger seat belt warning function to operate depending on the weight of the item.
To allow the front passenger seat weight sensor to function properly, do not place and sit on an additional seat cushion o n the front passenger seat. The sensor ma y not function properly because the addi-tional seat cushion could cause sensor interference.
When a small child sits on the front passenger seat, it is possible that the warning beep will not operate.

Ignition Not Switched OFF
If the driver’s door is opened while the igni-tion is placed in the ACC position, a contin-uous beep sound will be heard to notify the driver that the ignition has not been place d in the OFF position.
Left in this condition, the keyless entr y system will not operate, the car cannot b e locked, and the battery power will b e depleted.

Key Removed From Vehicle Warning Beep

Vehicles With Advanced Keyless Function
If the key is taken out of the vehicle while th e ignition is not switched OFF and all the door s are closed, the beep which sounds outside o f the vehicle will be heard six times, and the beep which sounds inside the vehicle will b e heard six times, and the KEY warning ligh t (red) will flash continuously in the instrument cluster to notify the driver that the ignition has not been switched OFF.

Vehicles Without Advanced Keyless Function
If the key is taken out of the vehicle while the ignition is not switched OFF and all the door s are closed, a beep will be heard inside the vehicle 6 times and the KEY warning light (red) will turn on continuously in th e instrument cluster to notify the driver that the ignition has not been switched OFF.

NOTE:
Because the key fob uses low-intensity radio waves, the warning may activate if the key fob is carried together with a metal object o r it is placed in a poor signal reception area.

Request Switch Inoperable Warning Beep — If Equipped With Advanced Keyless Function
If the request switch on the exterior doo r handle is pushed with a door open, or th e ignition has not been placed in the OFF posi-tion, a beep will be heard for about tw o seconds to indicate that the doors, and trun k lid cannot be locked.

Key Left-In-Trunk Compartment Warning Bee p— If Equipped With Advanced Keyless Function
If the key fob is left in the trunk with all door s locked and the trunk lid closed, a bee p sound is heard for about 10 seconds t o remind the driver the key fob has been left i n the trunk.
If this happens, open the trunk lid b y pushing the electric trunk lid opener an d remove the key fob. A key fob removed from the trunk may no t function because its functions may hav e been temporarily suspended. To restore th e key fob function, perform the applicabl e procedure. See paragraph “Keys” in “Gettin g To Know Your Vehicle” chapter.

Key Left-In-Vehicle Warning Beep (with the advanced keyless function)
If a key fob is left in the vehicle and all the doors and the trunk are locked using a sepa-rate key fob, a beep sound is heard for about 10 seconds to remind the driver that the key fob has been left in the vehicle.
If this happens, open the door and remove the key fob. A key fob removed from the vehicle this way may not function because it s functions may have been temporarily suspended.
Perform the applicable procedure to restore the functions of the key fob. See paragraph “Keys” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle ” chapter.

Vehicle Speed Alarm — If Equipped
The vehicle speed alarm function is designe d to alarm the driver via a single beep sound and a warning indication in the instrumen t cluster that the previously set vehicle speed has been exceeded.
You can change the vehicle speed setting a t which the warning is triggered. See para-graph “Trip Computer” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” chapter.

Tire Inflation Pressure Warning Beep — If Equipped
Vehicle With Conventional Tires: the warnin g beep sound will be heard for about three seconds when there is any abnormality in tir e inflation pressures. See “TPMS” in “Safety ” chapter.
Vehicle With Run-Flat Tires (If Equipped): th e warning beep sound will be heard for about three seconds if the tire pressures decrease. If the tire pressure decreases extremely, a beep sound will be heard for approximatel y 30 seconds. See “TPMS” in “Safety ” chapter.

Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System Warnin g Beep — If Equipped
Driving Forward: the warning beep operate s when the direction indicator lever is operate d to the side where the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning light is illuminated.

NOTE:
A personalized function is available t o change the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM ) warning beep sound volume.

Reversing: if a moving object such as a vehicle or two-wheeled vehicle approaches on the left or right from behind your vehicle, the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning sound is activated.

Electronic Steering Lock Warning Beep
The warning beep operates if the steering wheel is not unlocked after the keyless igni-tion START/STOP button is pushed.

Speed Limiter Warning Beep — If Equipped
If the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed b y about 2 mph (3 km/h) or more, a warnin g beep operates continuously.
The warning beep operates until the vehicl e speed decreases to the set speed or less.

FAQs

The red battery warning light: what does it mean?

The red battery warning light denotes a problem with the charging mechanism of the car. The battery, alternator, or electrical system could all be at fault.

What does the warning light for the engine temperature mean?

The engine overheating is indicated by the engine temperature warning light. If this light illuminates, it’s imperative to stop and let the engine cool.

What does the warning light for low oil pressure mean?

Low oil pressure is indicated by the oil pressure warning light. Check the oil level as soon as you stop the car. Running the engine with inadequate oil pressure might seriously harm it.

The check engine light: what does it mean?

The check engine light turns on when a problem with the engine, emissions, or other crucial systems is found by the car’s onboard diagnostics system. To find the precise issue, a diagnostic scan is necessary.

What does the ABS warning light mean?

The anti-lock braking system has an issue, as the ABS warning light indicates. The ABS system might not work properly, but the car can still be driven.

How can I interpret the red airbag warning light?

The red airbag warning light on a car indicates an issue with the airbag system. As quickly as possible, have a skilled technician examine and fix it.

The tire pressure warning light serves what purpose?

When tire pressure is too low, the tire pressure warning light lets you know. Tire pressure should be checked and set to the proper values.

What does the wrench light in yellow mean?

A maintenance issue, such as the requirement for an oil change or other standard maintenance, is often indicated by the yellow wrench light.

What does the yellow triangle with an exclamation point inside it signify?

The electronic stability control (ESC) mechanism is responsible for this warning light. It shows that the system is actively trying to keep the road stable.

What does the green light with the letter “P” mean?

The car is in park as indicated by the green “P” light. It serves as a shift position indicator rather than a warning light.

What does the low fuel warning light mean?

The low gasoline warning light informs you that your car needs to refuel. To avoid running out of petrol, you ought to refuel right away.

What does the arrow-surrounded green “A” stand for?

The automatic transmission indication is represented by the green “A” with the arrow surrounding it. It serves as a visual cue that the car is in “Drive” mode.

What does the yellow “!” symbol in a circle represent?

The warning light for the traction control system (ESC) or electronic stability control (ESC) is the yellow “!” light in a circle. When there is an issue with these systems, it is illuminated.

What does the red warning brake light mean?

The red brake warning light denotes a potential problem with the braking system, such as a leak or malfunction. Driving is dangerous with this light on.

What does the green “N” next to the automobile symbol mean?

The green “N” with a car icon denotes neutral driving, which means there is no gear selected by the transmission.

Useful Links

View full PDF: 2020 Fiat 124 Spider User Manual
2020 Fiat 124 Spider Seat Belts Instruction Guide

Tags Fiat, Fiat 124 Spider, Indicator Lights, Warning Lights

Fiat

2020 Fiat 124 Spider Seat Belts Instruction Guide

The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider is a sleek and thrilling convertible sports car that perfectly encapsulates Italian performance and design. While it may be simple to get distracted by the vehicle’s sleek design and exhilarating driving experience, it’s important to concentrate on the seat belts, which are a key component of this car’s safety. We shall delve into the seat belts of the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider in this introduction, examining their design, significance, and the function they play in guaranteeing the safety of the driver and passengers. The seat belts of the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider are an essential component in the overall safety of this fantastic sports car thanks to their cutting-edge technologies and crucial function in keeping you secure throughout your outdoor activities.

To ensure the highest level of safety and comfort, the seat belts in the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider were created using cutting-edge design and technology. These seat belts are not only practical; they are also aesthetically integrated into the inside of the automobile, merging in with the athletic and opulent design of the vehicle. Three-point seat belts are a conventional and very effective design for safety, and the Fiat 124 Spider has them for both the driver and the passenger. The occupant is restrained by these seat belts across the lap, over the shoulder, and both legs. In the event of a collision, this design aids in more equally distributing the impact forces, lowering the possibility of injuries. The Fiat 124 Spider is built for open-air enjoyment, and the seat belts are essential for maintaining safety even when you’re taking in the wind in your hair. The strong seat belt system is made to hold passengers safely in place during spirited rides, offering peace of mind without compromising the enjoyment of the ride. In summary, the seat belts of the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider are more than just a safety element; they are a crucial part of the car’s commitment to the wellbeing of the driver and passengers. These seat belts give you the confidence you need to fully enjoy the exciting sensation of driving this Italian convertible sports car while valuing safety above all thanks to its cutting-edge design and extensive safety features.

SEAT BELT SYSTEMS

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you. This can happe n far away from home or on your own street. Research has shown that seat belts sav e lives, and they can reduce the seriousness o f injuries in a collision. Some of the worst inju-ries happen when people are thrown from th e vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility o f ejection and the risk of injury caused b y striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone i n a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.

Seat Belt Precautions
Seat belts help to decrease the possibility of severe injury during accidents and sudden stops. FCA US LLC recommends that the driver and passengers always wear seat belts.

Mexico
All the seats have lap/shoulder belts. These belts have retractors with inertia locks that keep them out of the way when not in use. The locks allow the belts to remain comfort-able on users, but they will lock in position during a collision.

Except Mexico
All of the seat belt retractors are designed t o keep the lap/shoulder belts out of the way when not in use. The driver’s seat belt has no provisions for child-restraint systems and has only a n emergency locking mode. The driver may wear it comfortably, and it will lock during a collision. However, the passenger’s seat lap/shoulder belt retractor operates in two modes: emer-gency locking mode, and for child-restrain t systems, automatic locking mode. If yo u must use the passenger seat for a child, slid e the passenger seat as far back as possible and make sure any child restraint system i s secured properly.
Belt retraction may become difficult if the belts and seat belt guides are soiled, so try t o keep them clean. Refer to “Lap/Shoulder Belt” in ”Interiors”, found in “Servicing An d Maintenance” for further information.

Seat Belt Routing Guide

WARNING

Relying on the air bags alone could lea d to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions , the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if yo u are not properly buckled up. You ca n strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out o f the vehicle. Always be sure you an d others in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped wit h seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or not an air bag is also provided at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision , hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size.
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision. The seat bel t forces won’t be at the strong hip an d pelvic bones, but across your abdomen . Always wear the lap part of your seat bel t as low as possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect yo u properly. In a collision, it could even cu t into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If yo u can’t straighten a seat belt in you r vehicle, take it to an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. Th e lap portion could ride too high on you r body, possibly causing internal injuries . Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop , you could move too far forward , increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a colli-sion, increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong a s shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a colli-sion. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear you r shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder bel t are meant to be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with n o protection. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must b e replaced immediately. Do not disas-semble or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replace d after a collision.

Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use you r restraint system properly, to keep you an d your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take t o minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:

Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in the rear seat o f a vehicle with a rear seat.
A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for further information) must be secured in the appropriate child restraint or belt-posi-tioning booster seat in a rear seating position.
If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the sea t as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. Refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for further information.
Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
You should read the instruction s provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.
The driver and front passenger seat s should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room to inflate.
Do not lean against the door or window . If your vehicle has side air bags, an d deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupant s could be injured.
If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “Customer Assistance” section for customer service contact information.

WARNING

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years o r younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rea r seat. If the vehicle does not have a rea r seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Pregnant Women And Persons With Serious Medical Conditions
Pregnant women should always wear sea t belts. Ask your doctor for specific recom-mendations. The lap belt should be worn SNUGLY AN D AS LOW AS POSSIBLE OVER THE HIPS. The shoulder belt should be worn across you r shoulder properly, but never across the stomach area.

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

Persons with serious medical conditions also should wear seat belts. Check with you r doctor for any special instructions regarding specific medical conditions.

Emergency Locking Mode
When the seat belt is fastened, it will always be in the emergency locking mode.
In the emergency locking mode, the bel t remains comfortable on the occupant an d the retractor will lock in position during a collision. If the belt is locked and cannot be pulle d out, retract the belt once, and then tr y pulling it out slowly. If this fails, pull the bel t strongly one time and loosen, then pull it out again slowly.

Seat Belt With Automatic Locking Mode
When the seat belt is fastened, it will always be in the emergency locking mode until it i s switched to automatic locking mode b y pulling it all the way out to its full length.
If the belt feels tight and hinders comfort-able movement while the vehicle is stoppe d or in motion, it may be in the automati c locking mode because the belt has bee n pulled too far out.
To return the belt to the more comfortable emergency locking mode, wait until the vehicle has stopped in a safe, level area, retract the belt fully to convert it back t o emergency locking mode and then extend i t around you again.

Automatic Locking Mode
Always use the automatic locking mode t o keep the child-restraint system from shifting to an unsafe position in the event of an accident. To enable seat belt automatic locking mode, pull it all the way out and connect it a s instructed on the child restraint system. I t will retract down to the child restraint system and stay locked on it.

WARNING

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years o r younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rea r seat. If the vehicle does not have a rea r seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other sea t belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child.

Lap/Shoulder Belts
Fastening The Seat Belt

Fastening The Seat Belt

Seat Belt Tongue
Seat Belt Buckle

Position the lap belt as low as possible, no t on the abdominal area 2, then adjust the shoulder belt 3 so that it fits snugly agains t your body.

Adjusting The Seat Belt

Position Lap Belt Across Lap Area
Lap Belt Routing
Shoulder Belt Routing

Unfastening The Seat Belt
Depress the button on the seat belt buckle. If the belt does not fully retract, pull it out and check for kinks or twists. Then make sure it remains untwisted as it retracts.

Latching/Unlatching The Seat Belt

Seat Belt Release Button

NOTE:

If a belt does not fully retract, inspect it for kinks and twists. If it is still not retracting properly, have it inspected: contact a n authorized dealer.
Always wear the seat belt with it correctly routed in its guide. Wearing a seat bel t without the seat belt routed in its guide i s dangerous because the seat belt would no t be able to provide adequate protection i n an accident, which could result in serious injury.

Seat Belt Routing Guides

Shoulder Belt Routing Guides

Seat Belt Warning Systems
If it detects that the occupant seat belt i s unfastened, the warning light or beep alert s the occupant.
Refer to “Warning Lights And Messages” i n “Getting To Knowing Your Instrument Panel ” for further information.
Refer to “Seat Belt Warning Light” i n “Getting To Knowing Your Instrument Panel ” for further information.

Driver And Passenger BeltAlert (If Equipped)

Seat Belt Warning Systems
The LED on dashboard trim turns on if the driver or passenger’s seat is occupied an d the seat belt is not fastened with the ignition cycled to on.
If the driver or passenger’s seat belt is unfastened (only when the passenger seat is occupied) and the vehicle is driven at a speed faster than about 12 mph (20 km/h), theLED flashes. After a short time, the LED stops flashing, but remains illuminated. If a seat belt remains unfastened, the LE D flashes again for a given period of time. I n this case, fasten the seat belt.

Seat Belt Pretensioner
For optimum protection, the driver an d passenger seat belts are equipped with pretensioner and load limiting systems. For both these systems to work properly yo u must wear the seat belt properly.
The seat belt pretensioners are designed to deploy in moderate or severe frontal, near frontal collisions. In addition, during a side collision, the pretensioner operates on the side in which the collision occurs. The pretensioners operate differently depending on what types of air bags are equipped. For details on the seat belt pretensioner operation, refer to the “SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria” paragraph in this chapter. When a collision is detected, the pretensioners deploy simultaneously with the air bags. For deployment details, refer to the “SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria” para-graph in this chapter.
The seat belt retractors remove slack quickly as the air bags are expanding. Any time the air bags and seat belt pretensioners have fired they must be replaced.

With Passenger Occupant Classification System
In addition, the pretensioner system for the passenger, like the front and side passenger Air Bag, is designed to only deploy when the passenger occupant classification sensor detects a passenger sitting on the passenger’s seat.

NOTE:

These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced imme-diately.

Load Limiter
The load limiting system releases bel t webbing in a controlled manner to reduc e belt force on the occupant’s chest.
While the most severe load on a seat bel t occurs in frontal collisions, the load limite r has an automatic mechanical function an d can activate in any accident mode with suffi-cient occupant movement.
Even if the pretensioners have not fired, the load limiting function must be checked by a n authorized dealer.

FAQs

Is the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider needed to use seat belts?

Seat belts are required safety equipment in all automobiles, including the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider.

The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider has how many seat belts?

Two front seat belts for the driver and passenger are available on the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider.

The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider comes with rear seat belts, right?

There are no rear seats and no seat belts in the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider.

In the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider, can the seat belts be adjusted?

Yes, you can change the seat belts’ length to make them fit more comfortably.

In the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider, do the seat belt pretensioners work?

The seat belt pretensioners that tighten them in the event of a collision are included in the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider.

What is the procedure for buckling up in the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider?

Insert the metal latch into the buckle to fasten the seat belt, then wait for it to click to indicate that it is securely fastened.

Can I use child car seats with the seat belts on a 2020 Fiat 124 Spider?

The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider’s seat belts are compatible with child car seats, but make sure to adhere to the manufacturer’s recommendations.

In the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider, can the seat belts be adjusted for height?

The seat belts in the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider might be height-adjustable to ensure that all passengers are seated correctly.

How frequently should I check my 2020 Fiat 124 Spider’s seatbelts?

Regularly checking your seat belts for wear or damage and replacing them as needed is a smart habit.

The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider is equipped with seat belt reminders.

Yes, the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider comes with a seat belt reminder system to urge occupants to buckle up.

In the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider, what should I do if my seat belt becomes stuck?

Try gently pulling and releasing your seat belt if it becomes stuck to see if that solves the problem. Consult a specialist for inspection and repair if it continues.

Can I change the Fiat 124 Spider’s seat belt color?

Due to safety and legal requirements, altering the color of the seat belts in the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider may not be a good idea.

How can I clean my 2020 Fiat 124 Spider’s seat belts?

Avoid using harsh chemicals when cleaning seat belts; instead, use a solution of mild soap and water. Before retracting, make sure they are completely dry.

Is the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider compatible with seat belt extenders?

To accommodate larger passengers, seat belt extenders can be an accessory, but check with your dealership for your alternatives.

Can I turn off the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider’s seat belt warning chime?

Disabling the seat belt warning system is not advised because it is an essential safety element. For your safety and the safety of your passengers, always buckle up.

Useful Links

View full PDF: 2020 Fiat 124 Spider User Manual
2020 Fiat 124 Spider Specifications Guidelines

Tags Fiat, Fiat 124 Spider, Fiat 2020, Seat Belts

Fiat

2020 Fiat 124 Spider Transmission Guide

The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider is an alluring and fashionable sports car that deftly blends Italian flare with a long history of outstanding automotive design. This small convertible embodies the atmosphere of open-air driving and pays homage to the iconic 1960s Fiat 124 Spider. The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider is the epitome of nostalgia and modernity, with its alluring look, energetic performance, and reference to the past. The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider’s design, performance potential, technology, and other elements will be covered in detail in this introduction, making it a standout and thrilling option in the sports car category. No matter if you’re an avid enthusiast or just looking for an exhilarating driving experience, On the open road, the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider gives a taste of la dolce vita. With its classic form, the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider embodies Italian elegance.

Its sleek LED headlamps, prominent front grille, and curved body lines are reminiscent of vintage sports cars, and its small size and low-slung profile make it stand out on the road. You may enjoy the wind in your hair at any time thanks to the Spider’s retractable soft-top roof, which opens and closes with ease. The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider has an exciting driving experience thanks to its 1.4-liter turbocharged engine. With 184 lb-ft of torque and 160 horsepower, this roadster accelerates quickly and turns with accuracy. The rear-wheel-drive setup and fine-tuned suspension strike a perfect balance between comfort and sportiness, giving riders an exhilarating ride. The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider, which combines beauty, performance, and comfort in a compelling package, is a contemporary take on a vintage roadster. The Fiat 124 Spider offers an appealing and thrilling option in the world of sports vehicles, whether you’re looking for an iconic driving experience or simply want to draw attention wherever you go. It serves as an endearing reminder that driving can be an exhilarating, physical experience with a dash of Italian flair.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED

Manual Transmission

WARNING
You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied. The parkin g brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an incline.

CAUTION
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause abnormal wear on the clutch.

To engage the gears, press the clutch pedal fully and put the gear selector into the required position. The diagram for gear engagement is shown on the knob.

Gear Selector

Depress the clutch pedal all the way down while shifting, then release it slowly.
Your vehicle is equipped with a device t o prevent shifting to REVERSE (R) by mistake. Push the gear selector downward and shift t o REVERSE (R). A natural driving posture can be achieved by lightly gripping the gear selector from the side without having to rest your elbow on the center console. If shifting to REVERSE (R) is difficult, shift back into neutral, release the clutch pedal, and try again.

NOTE:
A certain amount of noise from the transmission is normal. This noise can be most noticeable when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), but it may also be hear d when driving. The noise may also be more noticeable when the transmission is warm. This noise is normal and is not an indication of a problem with your clutch or transmission.

With Parking Sensor System
When the gear selector is shifted to the REVERSE (R) position with the ignition placed in the ON mode, the parking sensor system is activated an audible sound is heard.

CAUTION

Keep your foot off the clutch pedal except when shifting gears. Also, do no t use the clutch to hold the vehicle on a n hill or grade. Riding the clutch will cause needless clutch wear and damage.
Do not apply any excessive lateral force to the gear selector when changing from FIFTH to FOURTH gear. This could lea d to the accidental selection of SECON D gear, which could result in damage t o the transmission.
Make sure the vehicle comes to a complete stop before shifting t o REVERSE (R). Shifting to REVERSE (R) while the vehicle is still moving ma y damage the transmission.
Reverse can only be engaged when the vehicle is completely stationary. Wit h the engine running, wait at least two seconds with the clutch pedal full y pressed before engaging reverse t o prevent damage to the gears.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED

Shift Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with an interlock system that holds the transmission gear selector in PARK (P) unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK (P), the ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN mode (engine running or not) an d the brake pedal must be pressed.

WARNING

It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or i n reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something . Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. A s with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running . Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition OFF . When the ignition is in the OFF mode , the transmission is locked in PARK , securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF mode , remove the key fob from the vehicle, an d lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle , or with access to an unlocked vehicle . Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parkin g brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

CAUTION
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:

Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

The gear selector must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) to operate the starter.
The transmission gear selector has PARK (P), REVERSE (R), NEUTRAL (N), DRIV E (D), and MANUAL (M)(+/–) shift positions.
The transmission may be shifted freely from REVERSE (R), to NEUTRAL (N), to DRIV E (D), to MANUAL (M)(+/–).

Gear Selector And Pattern

NOTE
Even if you intend to use the automatic transmission functions as a traditional automatic, you should also be aware that you ca n inadvertently shift into manual shift mode and an inappropriate gear may be retained a s the vehicle speed increases. If you notice the engine speed going higher or hear the engine racing, confirm you have not accidentally slipped into manual shift mode (refer to “Manual Shift Mode” paragraph in this section).

Shift Position Indication
The gear selector position (PRNDM) is illuminated when the ignition is placed in the ON mode.

NOTE:
If one of the following actions is performed, the gear selector position is displayed for fiv e minutes even if the ignition is placed in a mode other than ON.

The ignition is placed in the OFF mode.
The driver’s door is opened.

Gear Position Indication
In MANUAL (M) shift mode, the “M” of the shift position indication illuminates and the number of the selected gear is displayed.

Gear Selector Positions

PARK (P)
PARK (P) locks the transmission an d prevents the driveshaft from rotating.

WARNING

Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or i n reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something . Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. A s with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running . Before exiting a vehicle, always come t o a complete stop, then apply the parkin g brake, shift the transmission into PARK , turn the ignition OFF, and remove the key fob. When the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal) position (or , with pushbutton start, when the ignition is in the OFF mode), the transmission i s locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF mode , remove the key fob from the vehicle, an d lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle , or with access to an unlocked vehicle . Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-tended is dangerous for a number o f reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parkin g brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible t o children), and do not leave the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with push button start) in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

CAUTION

Before moving the transmission gear selector out of PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drive-train.

NOTE:

Shifting into PARK (P), NEUTRAL (N) o r REVERSE (R) while the vehicle is moving can damage your transmission.
Shifting into DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R ) when the engine is running faster than idle can damage the transmission.

REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle back-ward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
With Parking Sensor system: when the gear selector is shifted to the REVERSE (R) posi-tion with the ignition placed in the ON mode, the parking sensor system is activated an d an audible sound is heard.

NEUTRAL (N)
In NEUTRAL (N), the wheels and transmission are not locked. The vehicle will roll freely even on the slightest incline unless the parking brake or brakes are applied.

WARNING
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never tur n off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit you r response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.

NOTE:
Do not shift into NEUTRAL (N) when driving the vehicle. Doing so will damage the trans-mission. Press the parking brake or depress the brake pedal before moving the gear selector from NEUTRAL (N) to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly.

DRIVE (D)
DRIVE (D) is the normal driving position. From a stop, the transmission will automatically shift through all available gears.

MANUAL (M)
MANUAL (M) is the manual shift mode position. Gears can be shifted up or down b y operating the gear selector. (Refer t o “Manual Shift Mode” paragraph in this section).

WARNING
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision o r personal injury.

Active Adaptive Shift (AAS)
Active Adaptive Shift (AAS) automatically controls the transmission shift points to best suit the road conditions and driver input. This improves driving feel.
The transmission may switch to AAS mod e when driving up and down slopes, cornering, driving at high elevations, or depressing the accelerator pedal quickly while the gear selector is in the DRIVE (D) position. Depending on the road and driving conditions/vehicle operations, gear shifting could be delayed or not occur, however, this does not indicate a problem because the AA S mode will maintain the optimum gear position.

Shift-Lock System
The shift-lock system prevents shifting out o f PARK (P) unless the brake pedal i s depressed.

To shift from PARK (P):

Depress and hold the brake pedal.
Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode.
Press and hold the lock-release button o n the gear selector.
Move the gear selector.

When the ignition is in the ACC or OFF mode, the gear selector cannot be shifted fro m PARK (P).
The ignition cannot be placed in the OF F mode if the gear selector is not in PARK (P).

Shift Lock Override
If the gear selector will not move from PAR K (P) using the proper shift procedure, continue to press the brake pedal an d proceed as follows:

Remove the shift lock override cove r using a cloth wrapped flat head screw-driver.
Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the Override Access Hole, and push the override button down.
Push and hold the lock release button o n the gear selector and move the gear selector.
Take the vehicle to an authorized dealer.

Manual Shift Mode
The manual shift mode gives you the feel o f driving a manual transmission vehicle b y allowing you to operate the gear selector manually. This allows you to control engine RPM an d torque to the drive wheels much like a manual transmission when more control is desired. To change to MANUAL (M) shift mode, shift the gear selector from DRIVE (D) to MANUA L (M). To return to automatic shift mode, shift the gear selector from MANUAL (M) t o DRIVE (D). You can shift between DRIVE (D) an d MANUAL (M) mode at any time, without taking your foot off the accelerator.

NOTE:

If you change to manual shift mode when the vehicle is stopped, the gear will shift t o M1.
If you change to manual shift mode while the vehicle is moving it will remain in the current gear until a manual shift request is made.

Indicators

Manual Shift Mode Indication
In manual shift mode, the “M” of the shift position indication in the instrument panel illuminates.

Gear Position Indication
The numeral for the selected gear illuminates.

Instrument Panel

Manual Shift Mode Indication
Gear Position Indication

Manually Shifting Up/Down
To shift up to a higher gear, tap the gear selector rearward once (or tap the [+] shift paddle on the steering wheel [if equipped]).
To shift down to a lower gear, tap the gear selector forward once (or tap the [-] shift paddle on the steering wheel [if equipped]).

NOTE:

If a requested downshift would cause the engine to over-speed, that shift will no t occur.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed.
Do not drive the vehicle with the tachometer needle in the red zone while in manual shift mode.
During deceleration, the transmission may automatically shift down depending on vehicle speed.
You can start out, from a stop, in first o r second gear. Tapping the gear selector rearward (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second gear. Starting out in second gear can be helpful in snowy or icy conditions.

Paddle Mode — If Equipped
Tapping one of the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-), if equipped, while the gear selector is in DRIVE (D), will activate Paddle Mode (a temporary manual mode). The current gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster, with the “M” also illuminated. The transmission will revert back t o normal operation (if the gear selector remains in DRIVE) after a period of time, depending on accelerator pedal activity.

NOTE:
Because Paddle mode is only temporary, us e of the MANUAL (M) position is recommended if you need to drive the vehicle in a particular gear for long periods.

Driving Tips

Overtaking
For extra power when passing another vehicle or climbing steep grades, press the accelerator fully. The transmission will shift to a lower gear, depending on vehicle speed.

NOTE:

The accelerator pedal may initially feel heavy as it is being pressed, then feel lighter as it is pressed further. This change in pedal force controls whether or not kick-down should be performed.
While the gear selector is in the MANUAL (M) position and the Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) is turned off, manual shift mode does not switch to automatic shift mode even if the accelerator pedal is completely pressed. Tap the gear selector forward or rearward to select the appropriate gear.

Climbing steep grades from a stop
To climb a steep grade from a stopped position:

Press the brake pedal.
Shift to DRIVE (D) or M1, depending on the load weight and grade steepness.
Release the brake pedal while gradually accelerating.

Descending steep grades
When descending a steep grade, shift to lower gears, depending on load weight and grade steepness.
Descend slowly, using the brakes only occasionally to prevent them from overheating.

FAQs

How many gears does the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider have in its transmission?

A 6-speed manual transmission is standard on the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider, however a 6-speed automatic transmission is also available.

Is the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider’s automatic transmission conventional or dual-clutch?

The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider has a conventional 6-speed automatic transmission.

How does the 124 Spider’s manual transmission operate?

With more control over gear selection, the 124 Spider’s manual transmission provides a sporty and exciting driving experience.

What is the advantage of the 124 Spider’s 6-speed automatic transmission?

For those who prefer an automatic, the automatic transmission is a practical choice, especially in congested areas. Additionally, it has a manual shift option for more adventurous driving.

Is the automatic transmission equipped with a paddle shift option?

Yes, the 124 Spider’s 6-speed automatic transmission has paddle shifters for choosing manual gears.

For increased traction, does the 124 Spider have a limited-slip differential?

A mechanical limited-slip differential is used in the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider Abarth variant, which enhances handling and traction.

What is the automatic-transmission 2020 Fiat 124 Spider’s 0-60 mph time?

With an automatic transmission, the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider can reach 60 mph in roughly 7.3 seconds.

How does the 124 Spider perform when driving?

The 124 Spider is a fascinating vehicle to drive on twisting roads because of its reputation for precise and quick handling.

What is the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider’s fuel economy when equipped with a manual transmission?

The EPA estimates that the manual transmission 124 Spider gets 26 mpg in the city and 35 mpg on the highway.

Does the automatic transmission have a sport setting for more furious driving?

Yes, the 124 Spider’s automatic transmission offers a Sport setting that enhances throttle responsiveness and extends gear retention for a sportier driving experience.

Can the automatic transmission be switched between automatic and manual mode?

Yes, the automatic transmission allows you to move between automatic and manual mode, allowing you to manually swap gears using the paddle shifters or gear lever.

Is long-distance cruising possible with the automatic transmission?

Yes, long-distance traveling with an automatic transmission is smooth and comfortable, making it a perfect option for road trips.

What is the scope of the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider’s transmission warranty?

The regular Fiat 4-year/50,000-mile limited warranty applies to the transmission.

Are there any typical gearbox problems with the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider that you should be aware of?

Although there have been some reported problems with automatic transmissions, it is crucial to perform routine maintenance and treat any faults right once to avoid trouble.

Can I convert a manual transmission to an automatic one, or the other way around?

It may not be viable to change the transmission from automatic to manual or vice versa because it is a difficult, expensive process. In general, it’s not advised unless you have a lot of resources and knowledge.

Useful Links

View full PDF: 2020 Fiat 124 Spider User Manual
2020 Fiat 124 Spider Fuses and fuse box Guidelines

Tags Fiat, Fiat 124 Spider, Fiat 2020, Transmission

Fiat

2020 Fiat 124 Spider Specifications Guidelines

Intriguing and fashionable, the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider is a convertible sports vehicle that expertly blends Italian style with an enjoyable driving experience. We will go into the details that set this model apart from others in the automobile industry in this introduction. Enthusiasts will surely like the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider’s powerful powerplant, which is at its core. A 1.4-liter turbocharged four-cylinder engine with a remarkable 160 horsepower and 184 lb-ft of torque is housed under the hood. For those who want a more hands-on driving experience, this engine is mated to either a six-speed manual transmission or a six-speed automatic transmission for smooth cruising. The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider’s fascinating look is one of its most noticeable features. It features sleek lines, a long hood, and a low-slung posture that emanates sophistication and performance as a tribute to the traditional Italian roadsters of the past. With the simple lowering and raising of the soft-top convertible roof, you can instantly enjoy driving in the open air.

The 124 Spider’s interior is designed with the driver in mind and has supportive seats for spirited driving. The overall driving experience is improved with high-quality materials and an easy-to-use entertainment system, which also keeps you occupied and connected while you’re on the road. In terms of performance and handling, the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider excels. Every curve in the road is a complete thrill because to the rear-wheel-drive configuration, the chassis’ balance, and the precise steering. The 124 Spider boasts accurate handling that will satisfy even the most discriminating drivers thanks to weight distribution that is optimized for agility. With features like stability control, anti-lock brakes, and many airbags as standard equipment, safety is also a top emphasis. Advanced driver aid technologies that are optionally available increase safety and provide you peace of mind when driving. The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider is a spectacular sports convertible that combines Italian elegance and exhilarating performance. It stands out among sports cars because to its potent engine, stylish exterior, and fun-to-drive driving dynamics, making it a great option for individuals who value both style and substance in their automobile purchases. The Fiat 124 Spider guarantees an exceptional driving experience, whether you’re riding along the coast or negotiating winding mountain routes.

IDENTIFICATION DATA

Identification Numbers

Model Plate
The model plate is located on the left side of door pillar

Model Plate Location

Vehicle Identification Number
The Vehicle Identification Number is located below the left side (driver side) of the wind-shield.

Vehicle Identification Number

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label (U.S.A. and Canada)
The motor vehicle safety standard label is located on the left side of door pillar.

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label

Vehicle Emission Control Information Label (U.S.A. and Canada)
The vehicle emission control information label is located under the hood.

Vehicle Emission Control Information Label

Tire Pressure Label
The tire pressure label is located on the left side of door pillar.

Tire Pressure Label

Engine Number
The engine number label is located on the engine.

RECOMMENDED TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE

On the tire label you will find the recommended tire inflation pressure in both psi and kPa for the tires installed as original equipment on the vehicle.
It is very important that the inflation pressure of the tires on your vehicle is maintained at the recommended pressure.
You should check the tire pressure regularly to insure that the proper inflation pressure is maintained.

NOTE:

Tire pressures listed on the vehicle placard or tire information label indicate the recommended cold tire inflation pressure, measured when the tires are cold , after the vehicle has been parked for a t least three hours. As you drive, the temperature in the tire warms up , increasing the tire pressure.
Always check the tire inflation pressures on a regular basis according to the recommended tire inflation pressure on the tire label and in conjunction with the information in this Owner’s Manual. Driving your vehicle with under-inflated tires is dangerous. Under-inflation is the most common cause of failures in any kind of tire and may result in severe cracking , tread separation or “blowout”, with unexpected loss of vehicle control an d increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It results in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear , loss of control and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat. It is impossible to deter-mine whether or not tires are properly inflated just by looking at them.

Checking Tire Pressure
Proceed as follows:

When you check the air pressure, make sure the tires are cold – meaning they are not hot from driving even a mile.
Remove the cap from the valve on on e tire.
Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve.
Add air to achieve recommended air pressure.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
Replace the valve cap.
Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other object s embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak.
Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts, bulges, cracks or other irregularities.

Glossary Of Terms

Tire Placard
A label indicating the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes, recommended inflation pressure, and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry.

Tire Identification Number (TIN)
A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire bran d and manufacturing plant, tire size, and dat e of manufacture.

Inflation Pressure
A measure of the amount of air in a tire.

kPa
Kilopascal, the metric unit for air pressure.

psi
Pounds per square inch, the English unit for air pressure.

B-pillar
The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door.

Original Equipment (OE)
Describes components originally equipped on the vehicle.

Vehicle Load Limit
The maximum value of the combination weight of occupants and cargo.

Bead Area of the Tire
Area of the tire next to the rim.

Sidewall Area of the Tire
Area between the bead area and the tread.

Tread Area of the Tire
Area on the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when it’s mounted on the vehicle.

ENGINE

Engine

	1.4 Turbo Multi Air
Cycle	Four
Number and position of cylinders	4 inline
Piston bore and stroke (mm)	72.0 x 80.4
Total displacement (cm³)	1,368
Compression ratio	9.8:1
Maximum power (kW)	119 (Non-Abarth) 122 (Abarth)

	1.4 Turbo Multi Air
Maximum power (HP)	160 (Non-Abarth) 164 (Abarth)
Corresponding engine speed (RPM)	5,500
Maximum torque (Nm)	250
Maximum torque (lb.-ft.)	184
Corresponding engine speed (RPM)	2,500
Spark plugs	We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel	91 Octane Recommended (87 Octane Acceptable) (R+M)/2 Method Maximum 15% Ethanol Content

NOTE:
When cleaning the iridium plugs, do not use a wire brush. The fine particulate coating on the iridium alloy and platinum tips could b e damaged.

WARNING!

Modifications or repairs to the fuel supply system that are not carried out correctly or do not take the system’s technical specifications into account, can cause malfunctions leading to the risk of fire.

TRANSMISSION

Engine	Traction	Type	Description
1.4 Turbo Multi Air	RWD	Manual/Automatic	6-speed manual¹ / 6-speed Automatic Transmission²

If equipped with manual transmission
If equipped with automatic transmission

BRAKES

Engine	Front brakes	Rear brakes	Parking brake
1.4 Turbo Multi Air	Ventilated (floating type 11 inch (279.4 mm) diameter)	Solid (floating type 11 inch (279.4 mm) in diameter)	Mechanical (lever type)

NOTE:
Water, ice, and salt spread on the roads may deposit on the brake disks reducing braking efficiency the first time the brakes are applied.

SUSPENSIONS

Engine	Front	Rear
1.4 Turbo Multi Air	Double wishbone with stabilizer bars	Multilink with stabilizer bars

STEERING

Engine	Turning circle curb to curb, ft (m)	Type
1.4 Turbo Multi Air	30.8 (9.4)	Double pinion electric power assist system (DP – EPAS) – rack and pinion

DIMENSIONS

Dimensions
Dimensions are expressed in inches and refer to the vehicle equipped with its standard-supplied tires. Height is measured with vehicl e unloaded.
Trunk Volume: 4.9 cu. ft. (140 Liters)

Vehicle Dimension Chart

A	B	C	D	E	F
159.6 (4,054 mm)	90.9 (2,309 mm)	48.5 (1,232 mm)	58.9 (1,496 mm)	68.5 (1,740 mm)	59.1 (1,503 mm)

Weights
Curb Weight: 2,477 lbs (1,124 kg) (if equipped with manual transmission) / 2,516 lbs (1,141 kg) (if equipped with automatic transmission).

FLUID CAPACITIES

Item	Capacities
Fuel tank	11.9 (gallons) / 45 (liters)
Engine oil (without oil filter replacement)	3.3 (quarts) / 3.2 (liters)
Engine oil (with oil filter replacement)	4.0 (quarts) / 3.8 (liters)
Coolant (with manual transmission)	7.6 (quarts) / 7.2 (liters)
Coolant (with automatic transmission)	7.5 (quarts) / 7.1 (liters)
Manual transmission oil	2.2 (quarts) / 2.1 (liters)
Automatic transmission fluid	7.8 (quarts) / 7.5 (liters)
Rear differential oil	0.63 (quarts) / 0.6 (liters)
Limited slip differential oil	0.63 (quarts) / 0.6 (liters)
Brake fluid (& clutch fluid)	0.57 (quarts) / 0.55 (liters)

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Fluids And Lubricants
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil that has been thoroughly developed and tested in order to meet the requirements of the Scheduled Servicing Plan.
Constant use of the prescribed lubricants guarantees the fuel consumption and emission specifications. Lubricant quality is crucial for engine operation and duration.

Lubricant	Specification	Replacement interval
Engine oil	We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-40 Full Synthetic Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12991. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.	According to Scheduled Servicing Plan
Coolant	Mopar Long Life Coolant Concentrate for FIAT Spider	According to Scheduled Servicing Plan
Manual transmission oil	Mopar Manual Transmission Long Life Gear Oil for FIAT Spider
Automatic transmission fluid	Mopar Automatic Transmission Long Life Fluid for FIAT Spider
Rear differential oil	Mopar Long Life Hypoid Gear Oil for FIAT Spider
Limited slip differential oil	Mopar Long Life Limited Slip Additive for FIAT Spider
Brake/clutch fluid	We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.

If lubricants compliant with the required specifications are not available, products that comply with the minimum required characteristic s can be used for topping up; in this case optimal performance of the engine is not guaranteed.

CAUTION

Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (anti-freeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Addi-tive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible ” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OA T coolant (conforming to MS.90032), b y an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. D o not use additional rust inhibitors or anti-rust products, as they may not b e compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze ) is not recommended.

PERFORMANCE

Performance
Top speed after the initial period of usage of the vehicle.

Version	MPH (km/h)
1.4 Turbo Multi Air 160HP (Non-Abarth)	N/A
1.4 Turbo Multi Air 164HP (Abarth)	130 (209.2)

FAQs

What is the Fiat 124 Spider for 2020?

Sports car with two seats and a convertible, the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider.

What Fiat 124 Spider trim levels are offered for 2020?

There were three trim levels for the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider: Classica, Lusso, and Abarth.

What kind of engine is in the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider?

A 1.4-liter turbocharged 4-cylinder engine powers the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider.

What is the horsepower of the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider?

It has 164 horsepower in the Abarth trim and 160 horsepower in the Classica and Lusso trims.

What kind of transmission is it equipped with?

Both a 6-speed manual and a 6-speed automatic transmission are available for the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider.

What is the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider’s top speed?

Depending on the model, the peak speed varies significantly but is often about 130 mph.

How quickly does it gain speed from 0 to 60 mph?

From 0 to 60 mph, it takes about 6.3 seconds to accelerate.

What is the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider’s fuel efficiency?

The EPA estimates that the Classica and Lusso trims will score 26 mpg in the city and 35 mpg on the highway, while the Abarth trim would receive slightly less.

What measurements does the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider have?

The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider measures approximately 159 inches in length, 68.5 inches in width, and 48.5 inches in height.

What kind of cargo space does it provide?

A mere 4.9 cubic feet of cargo capacity can be found in the tiny trunk of the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider.

What safety features come standard?

Safety features such a rearview camera, airbags, stability control, and traction control are included with the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider.

Has the top been convertible?

The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider does indeed include a manually operated soft top convertible.

Which kind of audio system is offered?

The Lusso and Abarth trims include a 7-inch touchscreen infotainment system, while the Classica trim has a 3-inch display audio system.

What color options are there for the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider?

The available colors may differ depending on the trim, but popular possibilities include Rosso Red, Bianco White, and Nero Black.

How much does the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider cost at launch?

The beginning price for the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider varied depending on the trim level, with the Classica starting at about $25,390 and the Abarth starting at about $29,390.

Useful Links

View full PDF: 2020 Fiat 124 Spider User Manual
2020 Fiat 124 Spider Maintenance Schedule

Tags Fiat, Fiat 124 Spider, Fiat 2020, Specifications

Fiat

2022 Fiat 500X Cluster Warning Lights Guide

The 2022 Fiat 500X is a stylish and contemporary compact SUV that offers great performance and style in addition to a number of cutting-edge safety features. The Cluster Warning Lights system is one of these safety measures that stands out. In this introduction, we’ll examine the cutting-edge Cluster Warning Lights of the 2022 Fiat 500X and show how they improve the car’s overall safety and driving experience. These lights demonstrate Fiat’s dedication to both beauty and safety by alerting drivers to potential hazards and giving vital information at a glance. Join us as we examine the 2022 Fiat 500X’s sophisticated and user-friendly Cluster Warning Lights, which establish a new benchmark for safety.

Since safety is of the utmost importance, Fiat has made certain that these lights are compatible with other cutting-edge safety features like adaptive cruise control, lane-keeping assistance, and blind-spot monitoring. Together, they provide a complete safety net that gives you the assurance you need to drive. By providing real-time updates on critical vehicle data, the Cluster Warning Lights system significantly improves the overall driving experience. These lights provide a quick and practical method to obtain crucial information without taking your eyes off the road, including tire pressure, fuel efficiency, and navigational instructions. In conclusion, the 2022 Fiat 500X’s Cluster Warning Lights are more than simply aesthetically beautiful; they are a state-of-the-art information and safety system that improves the driving experience. You’ll learn how Fiat has successfully combined style, safety, and functionality as we explore deeper into this incredible vehicle, creating a new standard for compact SUVs.

WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES

The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained in the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a failure indication. All active telltales will display first if applicable. The system check menu may appear different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.

RED WARNING LIGHTS

Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault with the airbag, and will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System reservoir. If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level. The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.

WARNING
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer. The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.

NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related component.

Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.

NOTE:
As the coolant temperature gauge approaches “H,” this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound.

Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when one or more door(s) are not fully closed.

NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving and a door is opened, there will also be a single chime.

Drowsiness Detected Warning Light — If Equipped
Driver drowsiness detection helps to avoid crashes caused by fatigue by advising drivers to take a break in time. Once Drowsy Driver is detected, A pop-up will display continuously until the driver presses the OK button to clear. Once the pop-up message is cleared, it is stored until the condition is no longer true.

Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there’s a fault with the EPS system.

WARNING
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible.

Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a problem with the ETC system. If a problem is detected while the vehicle is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

Hood Open Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the hood is left open and not fully closed.

Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A chime will sound when this light turns on. Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver or passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound Ú page 201.

Transmission Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate (together with a message in the instrument cluster display and a buzzer) to indicate a transmission fault. Contact an authorized dealer if the message remains after restarting the engine.

Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security system is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.

Trunk Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the trunk is open and not fully closed.

YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault in the ACC system. Contact a local authorized dealer for service.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required as soon as possible. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, have the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer.

Audio System Failure Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate to report a failure of the Audio System. Contact an authorized dealership as soon as possible.

Electric Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the Electric Park Brake is not functioning properly and service is required. Contact an authorized dealer.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the ESC system is Active. The ESC Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/ RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine running. If the ESC Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this warning light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is off. Each time the ignition is turned to ON/ RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off previously.

Drive Mode System Overheating
This symbol appears, together with a dedicated message on the display, in case of overheating of the Drive Mode Selector system. In these conditions, the Drive Mode Selector system can still be used to select the required driving mode, but the mode will be engaged only when the system cools down. The symbol will stay on for as long as the overheating condition persists.

Drowsiness Detected System Fault Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the Drowsiness Detected System is not operating correctly and requires service. Please see an authorized dealer.

External Light Failure Indicator Light —If Equipped
The External Light Failure Indicator will come on when a failure to one of the following lights is detected:

Direction Indicators
Backup Lights
Parking Lights
Daytime Running Lights
License Plate Lights

The failure relating to these lights could be:

One or more blown bulbs
A blown protection fuse
A break in the electrical connection

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disengage the light. If the light does not turn off, please see an authorized dealer.

Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 1.3–1.8 gal (5–7 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added.

LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense Warning Light will be solid yellow when the vehicle is approaching a lane marker. The warning light will flash when the vehicle is crossing the lane marker.

Service LaneSense Warning Light —If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the LaneSense system is not operating and requires service. Please see an authorized dealer.

Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. This warning light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before the engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after the engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing. When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible if this occurs.

WARNING
A malfunctioning catalytic converter can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.

CAUTION
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.

Service Warning Light — If Equipped
The “Maintenance Plan” includes vehicle maintenance at fixed intervals. This message is displayed automatically along with the warning light when the key is turned to RUN – 1,242 miles (2,000 km) or 30 days before these deadlines, and reappears every time the key is turned to RUN. The indication will appear in miles or kilometers according to the “Unit Of Measurement” settings. When the next scheduled service is approaching and the key is turned to RUN, the word “Service” will appear on the display, followed by the number of miles or kilometers left. Contact an authorized dealership. The operations in the “Maintenance Plan” will be performed and the message will be reset.

Service Stop / Start System Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the Stop/Start system is not functioning properly and service is required. Contact an authorized dealer for service.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed. Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned previously, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire.

CAUTION
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

CAUTION
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.

Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into PARK and run the engine at idle or slightly higher until the light turns off.

WARNING
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.

CAUTION
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure.

YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS

Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when there is a malfunction in one of the exterior bulbs.

Full Brake Control System Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.

Full Brake Control System Off Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate that the Full Brake Control System is off.

Fuel Cutoff Failure Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate if there is a fuel cutoff failure. If this light illuminates, take it to an authorized dealer and have them inspect it.

Fuel Cutoff Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will illuminate after an accident has occurred, and the system has shut the fuel off.

Fuel Level Sensor Failure
This light illuminates when there is a fuel level sensor failure. If this light illuminates, take it to an authorized dealer and have them inspect it.

Icy Road Condition Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate during an icy road condition.

Immobilizer Fail / VPS Electrical Alarm Indicator Light
This telltale will illuminate when the vehicle security system system has detected an attempt to break into the vehicle.

NOTE:
After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the Vehicle Security Warning Light could illuminate if a problem with the system is detected. This condition will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.

GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS

Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the cruise control is set to the desired speed.

Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.

LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light illuminates solid green when both lane markings have been detected and the system is “armed” and ready to provide visual and torque warnings if an unintentional lane departure occurs.

Parking / Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the parking lights or headlights are turned on.

Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode.

Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated, the turn signal indicator will flash independently and the corresponding exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be activated when the multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up (right).

NOTE:

A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.

Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport Mode is active.

WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS

LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, but not armed, the LaneSense indicator light illuminates solid white. This occurs when only left, right, or neither lane line has been detected. If a single lane line is detected, the system is ready to provide only visual warnings if an unintentional lane departure occurs on the detected lane line.

Light Sensor Failure Indicator Light
This light illuminates when there is light sensor failure. If this light illuminates, have an authorized dealer inspect it.

Speed Warning Indicator Light — If Equipped
The indicator light will illuminate white along with a notification text message (Speed Warning Set to XX followed by unit). When the set speed is exceeded, a single chime will sound along with pop-up message of “Speed Warning Exceeded.” Speed Warning can be turned on and off in the instrument cluster display. The number “55” is only an example of a speed that can be set.

Idle Coasting Indicator Light
The Idle Coasting feature works by allowing engine speeds to drop to idle, saving fuel. This feature is a menu option. The indicator is only seen when Idle Coasting is chosen and active.

BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS

High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the high-beam headlights are on. With the low beams activated, push the multifunction lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, “flash to pass” scenario.

GRAY INDICATOR LIGHTS

Cruise Control Ready/Canceled Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the cruise control has been turned on, but not set, or canceled by the driver.

FAQs

What are warning lights in a car cluster?

Warning lights are symbols or icons on a car’s instrument cluster that illuminate to alert the driver of a specific issue or condition.

How do I identify warning lights on my car’s cluster?

Your car’s owner’s manual should have a section that explains the meaning of each warning light and its symbol.

What should I do if a warning light comes on?

It depends on the specific warning light. Some lights indicate minor issues, while others may indicate more serious problems. Refer to your owner’s manual for guidance on how to proceed.

What are some common warning lights in cars?

Common warning lights include the check engine light, oil pressure warning light, battery warning light, brake system warning light, and tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) light.

What does the check engine light mean?

The check engine light indicates an issue with the engine or its related systems. It can range from minor issues like a loose gas cap to more serious engine problems.

What does the oil pressure warning light indicate?

The oil pressure warning light comes on when there is low oil pressure in the engine, which can lead to engine damage if not addressed promptly.

Why does the battery warning light illuminate?

The battery warning light indicates a charging system problem. It could be a faulty alternator or a weak battery.

What should I do if the brake system warning light comes on?

If the brake system warning light illuminates, it may indicate a problem with the brake system, such as low brake fluid or a malfunctioning brake sensor. Have your brakes inspected immediately.

What does the TPMS warning light mean?

The TPMS warning light comes on when one or more tires have low pressure. Check your tire pressure and inflate them to the recommended levels.

What does the ABS warning light indicate?

The ABS (Antilock Brake System) warning light indicates a problem with the ABS system, which can affect your car’s braking performance.

Why does the airbag warning light come on?

The airbag warning light comes on when there is a fault in the airbag system. It’s essential to address this issue promptly for safety reasons.

What does the coolant temperature warning light mean?

The coolant temperature warning light indicates that the engine is running hot. Overheating can lead to engine damage, so pull over and allow the engine to cool down.

Why does the traction control system (TCS) warning light illuminate?

The TCS warning light indicates a problem with the traction control system, which helps prevent wheel spin and maintain control in slippery conditions.

What does the low fuel warning light mean?

The low fuel warning light indicates that you need to refuel your vehicle soon. Running out of fuel can cause engine damage and leave you stranded.

How can I reset a warning light on my car’s cluster?

Some warning lights may reset on their own once the issue is resolved. Others may require a diagnostic tool to reset. It’s best to consult your owner’s manual or a mechanic for guidance.

Useful Links

View full pdf: 2022 Fiat 500X User Manual
2022 Fiat 500X Instrument Panel Guide

Tags Cluster Warning Lights, Fiat, Fiat 2022, Fiat 500X

Fiat

2020 Fiat 124 Spider Fuses and fuse box Guidelines

A stylish and sporty convertible sports car that provides an exhilarating driving experience is the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider. The fuse box and its accompanying fuses are among the vital parts of this amazing car. Despite being frequently disregarded, these parts are vital to the security and efficiency of the car’s different electrical systems. The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider’s fuse box acts as a safety hub for the electrical system of the car. It houses a number of fuses that serve as safeties, keeping important components from being harmed by electrical overloads and short circuits. When they notice an excessive current flow, these fuses are made to shut off the circuit, effectively eliminating any potential electrical risks.

We shall discuss the significance of the fuse box and fuses in the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider in this introduction. We will examine how they keep the car’s electrical systems secure, guarantee a trouble-free ride, and provide both drivers and passengers piece of mind. Let’s set out on a journey to learn more about how these simple but crucial parts support the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider’s dependability and safety.

REPLACING FUSES

General Information

WARNING

When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse wit h the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Do not place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, transmission system) or steering system blows, contact an authorized dealer.

Your vehicle’s electrical system is protected by fuses.
If any lights, accessories, or controls do not work, inspect the appropriate circuit protector. If a fuse has blown, the inside element will be melted. If the same fuse blows again, go to an authorized dealer a s soon as possible.

Fuse location
Fuses are grouped together in two fuse boxes located in the interior on the left side of the vehicle and under the hood.

Interior Fuses
If the electrical system does not work, firs t inspect the fuses on the vehicle’s left side.

Proceed as follows:

Make sure the ignition is placed in the OFF mode, and other switches are turned off.
Open the fuse panel cover (located near the door).Fuse Panel Cover
Press retaining clip and remove protec-tion cover.
Pull the fuse straight out with the fuse puller provided on the fuse block locate d in the engine compartment.
Inspect the fuse and replace it if it is blown.
1. Normal Fuse
2. Blown Fuse
Insert a new fuse of the same amperage rating, and make sure it fits tightly. If it does not fit tightly, contact an authorized dealer. If you have no spare fuses, borrow one of the same rating from a circuit no t essential to vehicle operation, such as the audio or outlet circuit.
Reinstall the cover and make sure that it is securely installed.

NOTE:
Always replace a fuse with a genuine FCA fuse or equivalent of the same rating. Other-wise you may damage the electric system.

Underhood Fuses
If the headlights or other electrical components do not work and the fuses in the cabin are normal, inspect the fuse block in the engine compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must be replaced.
Make sure the ignition is placed in the OFF mode, and other switches are turned off an d remove the fuse block cover. If the lock is forcefully opened, the fuse block cover ma y come in contact with the frame when it is removed and become scratched.

When removing the cover, remove it slowly according to the following procedure:

Disengage the rear lock by pressing down on the front tab with your fingers.
1. Lock
2. Cover
Remove the front tab while slightly lifting the front of the cover.
Remove the cover while lifting it and sliding it to the rear.
If any fuse but the main fuse is blown , replace it with a new one of the same amperage rating.
Reinstall the cover and make sure that it is securely installed.

Fuse Block (Engine Compartment)

DESCRIPTION		FUSE RATING	PROTECTED COMPONENT
F01	ENG IG3	5 Amp	Engine Control Systems
F02	ENG IG2	5 Amp	Engine Control Systems
F03	HORN2	7.5 Amp	Horn
F04	C/U IG1	15 Amp	For Protection Of Various Circuits
F05	ENG IG1	7.5 Amp	Engine Control System
F06	—	—	—
F07	INTERIOR	15 Amp	Overhead Light
F08	—	—	—
F09	AUDIO2	15 Amp	Audio System
F10	METER1	10 Amp	Instrument Cluster

DESCRIPTION		FUSE RATING	PROTECTED COMPONENT
F11	SRS1	7.5 Amp	Air Bag
F12	—	—	—
F13	RADIO	7.5 Amp	Audio System
F14	ENGINE3	20 Amp	Engine Control System
F15	ENGINE1	10 Amp	Engine Control System
F16	ENGINE2	15 Amp	Engine Control System
F17	AUDIO1	25 Amp	Audio System
F18	A/C MAG	7.5 Amp	Air Conditioner
F19	AT PUMP H/L HI	20 Amp	Transmission Control System (If Equipped)
F20	AT	15 Amp	Transmission Control System (If Equipped)
F21	D LOCK	25 Amp	Power Door Locks
F22	H/L RH	20 Amp	Headlight (RH)
F23	ENG + B2	7.5 Amp	Engine Control System
F24	TAIL	20 Amp	Taillights/Number Plate Lights/Position Lights
F25	—	—	—
F26	ROOM	25 Amp	Overhead Light
F27	FOG	15 Amp	Fog Lights
F28	H/CLEAN	20 Amp	Headlight Washer (If Equipped)
F29	STOP	10 Amp	Stop Lights/Rear Fog Light (If Equipped)
F30	HORN	15 Amp	Horn
F31	H/L LH	20 Amp	Headlight (LH)
F32	ABS/DSC S	30 Amp	ABS/DSC System
F33	HAZARD	15 Amp	Hazard Warning Flashers/Direction Indicators Lights
F34	FUEL PUMP	15 Amp	Fuel System

DESCRIPTION		FUSE RATING	PROTECTED COMPONENT
F35	ENG + B3	5 Amp	Engine Control System
F36	WIPER	20 Amp	Windshield Wipers
F37	CABIN + B	50 Amp	For Protection Of Various Circuits
F38	—	—	—
F39	—	—	—
F40	ABS/DSC M	50 Amp	ABS/DSC System
F41	EVVT A/R PUMP	20 Amp	Engine Control System
F42	—	—	—
F43	—	—	—
F44	FAN2	40 Amp	Cooling Fan
F45	ENG.MAIN	40 Amp	Engine Control System
F46	EPS	60 Amp	Power Steering System
F47	DEFOG	30 Amp	Rear Window Defogger
F48	IG2	30 Amp	For Protection Of Various Circuits
F49	—	—	—
F50	HEATER	40 Amp	Air Conditioner
F51	—	—	—
F52	—	—	—

Fuse Block Interior

DESCRIPTION		FUSE RATING	PROTECTED COMPONENT
F01	RHT R	30 Amp	—
F02	RHT L	30 Amp	—
F03	—	—	—
F04	—	—	—
F05	F.OUTLET	15 Amp	Accessory Sockets
F06	—	—	—
F07	AT IND	7.5 Amp	AT Shift Indicator — If Equipped
F08	MIRROR	7.5 Amp	Power Control Mirror
F09	R_DECK R	30 Amp	—
F10	R_DECK L	30 Amp	—
F11	F.WASHER	15 Amp	Windshield Washer
F12	P.WINDOW	30 Amp	Power Windows
F13	—	—	—

DESCRIPTION		FUSE RATING	PROTECTED COMPONENT
F14	SRS2/ESCL	15 Amp	—
F15	SEAT WARM	20 Amp	Heated Seats — If Equipped
F16	M.DEF	7.5 Amp	—

FAQs

What does an automobile fuse do?

A fuse is a safety feature that guards against overloads and short circuits by interrupting the circuit if too much current is flowing through it.

The location of the fuse box in a 2020 Fiat 124 Spider.

In a 2020 Fiat 124 Spider, the fuse box is normally found in the engine bay.

The fuse box is accessible, but how?

Open the hood of the automobile and look for a plastic cover with fuse symbols on it to locate the fuse box. To access the fuses, remove the lid.

What do the various fuse ratings actually mean?

The maximum current that may pass through a fuse before it blows is indicated by the fuse ratings. You should replace a blown fuse with one that has the same rating because they are rated in amperes (A).

How do I recognize a blown fuse?

To check if the metal strip inside the fuse is intact, visually inspect it. The fuse blows if it is broken.

How should I handle a blown fuse?

Replace blown fuses with fresh ones of the same rating. To prevent electrical issues, use the proper type of fuse at all times.

What typical problems can result in a fuse blowing?

Electrical defects, short circuits, overloading of circuits, and faulty parts like a broken audio or headlights are frequent problems.

Is it secure to change a blown fuse on your own?

As long as you adhere to the vehicle’s instructions and safety considerations, it is safe to replace a blown fuse.

If I don’t have the appropriate fuse available, may I use one with a higher rating?

No, using a fuse with a higher rating is not advised since it may cause fire or electrical system damage. Use the proper fuse rating at all times.

What should I do if, after replacing a blown fuse, I still can’t identify its root cause?

If a fuse keeps blowing even after being replaced, there can be a deeper electrical issue. For a comprehensive inspection, it is recommended to speak with a professional or a Fiat service shop.

Can I use a circuit breaker to replace a fuse?

It is not advised to replace a fuse with a circuit breaker unless a qualified mechanic who is familiar with the vehicle’s electrical system does it.

What do the variously colored fuses serve?

Frequently, different colored fuses signify various amperage ratings. To interpret the colors and amperage values, consult your owner’s manual or the fuse box cover.

Can I use a wire or another temporary fix to replace a fuse?

No, using a wire or any other temporary fix is risky and may result in electrical fires or electrical system damage to the car. Replace blown fuses with the proper kind at all times.

What causes fuses to blow in a Fiat 124 Spider most frequently?

Electrical shorts, overloaded circuits, broken parts, or damaged wiring are a few typical causes.

Can I stop my Fiat 124 Spider’s fuses from blowing?

To lower the possibility of blown fuses, regularly check and repair the electrical parts of your car. If you keep having problems, get a qualified mechanic to look at the car.

Useful Links

View full PDF: 2020 Fiat 124 Spider User Manual
2020 Fiat 124 Spider Maintenance Schedule

Tags Fiat, Fiat 124 Spider, Fuse Box, Fuses

Fiat

2020 Fiat 124 Spider Maintenance Schedule

A beautiful and sporty convertible sports car, the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider promises a thrilling driving experience. Regular maintenance is necessary to maintain the optimal performance and perfect condition of this Italian-inspired roadster. Understanding the essential components of preserving the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider is essential, regardless of whether you’re a proud owner or considering adding this gem to your collection. We’ll go into detail about the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider’s maintenance requirements in this guide, giving you helpful insights into the respect and care that this extraordinary car merits.

We’ll arm you with the knowledge you need to keep your Fiat 124 Spider running smoothly, so you can take advantage of all the road has to offer, from routine maintenance checks to important advice on maintaining its appearance and functionality. So let’s set out on a quest to learn how to maintain your 2020 Fiat 124 Spider so that it continues to stand as a testament to Italian automotive brilliance for years to come.

SCHEDULED SERVICING

Be extremely careful and prevent injury to yourself and others or damage to your vehicle when using this Owner’s Manual for inspection and maintenance. If you are unsure about any procedure it describes, we strongly urge you to have a reliable and qualified service shop perform the work, preferably at an authorized dealer. Factory-trained FCA technicians and genuine FCA parts are best for your vehicle. Without this expertise and the parts that have been designed and made especially for your vehicle, inadequate, incomplete, and insuffi-cient servicing may result in problems. This could lead to vehicle damage or an accident and injuries. For expert advice and quality service, contact an authorized dealer.

NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 kilo-meters) or 1 year.

To continue New Vehicle Limited Warrant y eligibility and to protect your investment, it is your responsibility to properly maintain your vehicle according to factory recommended schedules outlined in this Owner’ s Manual. As part of this you must keep you r maintenance records, receipts, repair order s and any other documents as evidence this maintenance was performed. You must present these documents, should any Ne w Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage disagreement occur. Failure to do so can result in your New Vehicle Limited Warranty bein g voided either in whole or in part.
This evidence may consist of the following:

Original copies of repair orders or other receipts that include the mileage and dat e the vehicle was serviced. Each receipt should be signed by a qualified automotive service technician.
For self maintenance, a statement that you completed the maintenance yourself , displaying mileage and the date the work was performed. Also, receipts for the replacement parts (fluid, filters, etc.) indicating the date and mileage must accompany this statement.

NOTE:
If you elect to perform maintenance yoursel for have your vehicle serviced at a location other than an authorized dealer, FC A requires that all fluids, parts and material s must meet FCA standards for durability an d performance as described in this Owner’ s Manual.

Claims against the warranty resulting from lack of maintenance, as opposed to defective materials or authorized FCA workmanship, will not be honored.
Any auto repair shop using parts equivalent to your vehicle’s original equipment ma y perform maintenance. But we recommend that it always be done by an authorize d dealer using genuine FCA parts. Selectin g “Maintenance Monitor” enables the system to notify you of your vehicle’s approaching inspection/servicing period.

Owner Maintenance Precautions
The owner or a qualified service technician should make these vehicle inspections at the indicated intervals to ensure safe an d dependable operation.
Bring any problem to the attention of a n authorized dealer or qualified service technician as soon as possible.

When refueling perform inspection of:

Brake and clutch fluid level
Engine coolant level
Engine oil level
Washer fluid level

At least monthly perform inspection of:

Tire inflation pressures
At least twice a year (for example, ever y spring and fall) perform inspection of:

Engine coolant
Engine oil

As explained in the Introduction paragraph of “Scheduled Servicing”, several procedures can be done only by a qualified service technician with special tools. For details, read the separate Warrant y Booklet provided with the vehicle. If you are unsure about any servicing or maintenance procedure, have it done by an authorize d dealer. There are strict environmental laws regarding the disposal of waste oil and fluids. Pleas e dispose of your waste properly and with du e regard to the environment. We recommend that you entrust the oil an d fluid changes of your vehicle to an authorized dealer.

Periodic Checks
Every 620 miles (1,000 km) or before long trips check and, if necessary, top off:

Engine coolant level
Brake fluid level
Windshield washer fluid level
Tire inflation pressure and condition
Operation of lighting system (headlights , direction indicators, hazard warning lights, etc.)
Operation of windshield washer/wiper system and positioning/wear of windshield wiper blades.

Every 1,860 miles (3,000 km) check and to p off the engine oil level if required

Heavy-Duty Use Of The Vehicle
If the vehicle is used under one of the following conditions:

Dusty roads
Short, repeated trips less than 4.4 – 5 miles (7 – 8 km) at sub-zero outside temperatures
Engine idling for long periods of time or driving long distances at low speeds or long periods of inactivity

The following checks must be carried out more often than indicated in the Schedule d Servicing Plan:

Check front disc brake pad condition and wear
Check cleanliness of underhood area and all door and trunk locks, cleanliness an d lubrication of linkage
Visually inspect conditions of the: engine , transmission, lines and hoses (exhaust/fuel system/brakes) and rubber elements (hoses/belts/etc.)
Check battery charge and battery fluid level
Visually inspect conditions of the accessory drive belts
Check and, if necessary, change engine oil and replace oil filter
Check and, if necessary, replace cabin air filter
Check and, if necessary, replace air cleaner

Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 mile s (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is oper-ated predominately at idle or only very lo w engine RPM. This type of vehicle use i s considered Severe Duty.

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)

10,000

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years:

Or Kilometers:

16,000

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, if

necessary, check Tire Service Kit expiration date (if equipped).

•

Check operation of lighting system (headlamps,

direction indicators, hazard warning lights, luggage compartment, passenger compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.).

•

Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels

(brakes/hydraulic clutch, windshield washer, battery, engine coolant, etc.).

•

Check engine control system operation (via

diagnostic tool).

•

Visually inspect condition of: exterior bodywork,

underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust – fuel system – brakes), rubber elements (boots, sleeves, bushings, etc.).

•

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)

10,000

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years:

Or Kilometers:

16,000

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Visually inspect conditions of steering elements and check their operation.

•

Check the front and rear suspension, tie rods, CV Joints, and replace if necessary.

•

Check endfloat of wheel bearings.

•

Check windshield/rear window wiper blade position/wear.

•

Check operation of windshield washer system and adjust jets if necessary.

•

Check cleanliness of hood and trunk locks and cleanliness and lubrication of linkages.

•

Check parking brake lever travel and adjust, if necessary.

•

Visually check the condition and wear of the front and rear brakes.

•

Visually inspect condition of evaporation control system.

•

Visual inspect the condition and tensioning of the accessory drive belt.

•

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)

10,000

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years:

Or Kilometers:

16,000

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Replace the accessory drive belt. ¹

•

Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.

•

Change engine oil and replace oil filter.²

In accordance with Oil Change Indicator System OR Severe Duty Mileage, whichever

occurs first.

o Replace spark plugs (1.4L Turbo engine).3

•

Replace engine air filter.⁴

•

Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years

or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.

•

Replace the timing belt (1.4L Turbo Engine).

•

Replace belt every 40,000 miles (60,000 km) for use on dusty roads.
The oil and oil filter replacement must be carried out when indicated by a warning light or message on the instrument panel, or in any case should not exceed one year.
The spark plug change is distance based only, yearly intervals do not apply. The following are essential to ensure correct operation and prevent serious damage to th e engine:
Only use spark plugs of the same make and type which are specially certified for such engines (refer to “Engine” in “Technical Specifications” for further information). Strictly comply with the spark plug replacement interval given in the scheduled servicing plan for spark plug replacement. Contact an authorized dealer if you have any questions.
The engine air cleaner should be inspected at every oil change if used in dusty areas.

WARNING

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have an y doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause a n accident.

FAQs

How frequently should I have my Fiat 124 Spider’s oil changed?

Depending on driving circumstances, Fiat advises changing the oil every 6,000 to 10,000 kilometers.

How should I care for my Fiat 124 Spider’s oil?

Use a premium synthetic 5W-40 oil that satisfies the requirements listed in your owner’s manual.

When should the air filter be changed?

The owner’s manual or every 15,000 to 30,000 miles is the suggested interval for changing the air filter.

How often should I check the pressure in my tires?

At least once a month, check the tire pressure and adjust it to the levels suggested in the owner’s manual.

What is the suggested frequency of tire rotation?

To guarantee even wear, rotate the tires every 6,000 to 8,000 miles.

How often should I replace my spark plugs?

Spark plugs should typically be changed every 30,000 to 60,000 miles.

How frequently should I replace my brake fluid?

Replace the brake fluid every two years, or as directed in your owner’s handbook.

How often should coolant be replaced?

Depending on the type of coolant being used, replace the coolant every two to five years.

Is premium fuel required for the Fiat 124 Spider?

Regular unleaded can be used, however premium fuel is advised for best results.

How frequently should I check the fluid in my transmission?

For precise timing, see your owner’s manual; typically, it’s checked every 30,000 to 60,000 miles.

When should the serpentine belt be changed?

Every 60,000 to 100,000 miles or as specified in the owner’s manual, replace the serpentine belt.

Does the convertible top require any additional maintenance procedures?

To guard against dirt and water damage, routinely clean and condition the convertible top.

How frequently should the cabin air filter be changed?

Every 15,000 to 30,000 miles or as directed in the owner’s manual, replace the cabin air filter.

How frequently should the suspension be checked?

When doing routine maintenance or as necessary depending on the driving situation, inspect the suspension parts.

What is the scope of the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider’s warranty?

The standard warranties for the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider include a 4-year basic warranty and a 4-year/50,000-mile powertrain warranty. However, the specifics of your vehicle’s warranty may differ.

Useful Links

View full PDF: 2020 Fiat 124 Spider User Manual
2020 Fiat 124 Spider Engine Oil and Fluids

Tags Fiat, Fiat 124 Spider, Fiat 2020, Maintenance

Fiat

2020 Fiat 124 Spider Engine Oil and Fluids

The 2020 Fiat 124 Spider is a sporty convertible automobile that embodies Italian automotive design and engineering. The engine oil and fluids are one of the essential parts that keep this amazing vehicle running properly. We’ll delve into the significance of engine oil and fluids in this introduction in order to preserve the functionality and durability of the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider. The lifeblood of any car’s engine is engine oil, and the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider is no different. The appropriate engine oil is crucial for maintaining the performance of this roadster’s lively and effective engine. It reduces friction and heat generation by lubricating the engine’s moving parts and aids in maintaining ideal operating temperatures. Additionally, it is essential for halting wear and tear, giving a longer lifespan for the engine in your Fiat 124 Spider.

Other than engine oil, many fluids are equally essential to the overall efficiency and safety of the vehicle. For instance, the transmission fluid is in charge of ensuring that gears move smoothly and that power is transferred from the engine to the wheels. Your braking system’s efficiency and safety are ensured by brake fluid, while coolant controls engine temperature to prevent overheating. Maintaining these fluids properly, including routine inspections, replacements, and top-ups as necessary, is essential to keeping your 2020 Fiat 124 Spider operating at full efficiency. Missing out on these vital fluids might result in diminished performance, lower efficiency, and even long-term damage. In this manual, we’ll go over the particular fluids your Fiat 124 Spider needs, the best times to change them, and how crucial it is to follow these instructions. Understanding the relevance of engine oil and fluids will help you appreciate the amazing driving experience that the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider has to offer, whether you’re a proud owner of this Italian classic or considering joining the ranks.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Checking Levels

Window Washer Reservoir
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Cap
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir Cap
Battery

Engine Oil

WARNING

Be very careful when working in the engine compartment when the engine is hot: you may get burned.
Do not get too close to the radiator cooling fan: the electric fan may start; danger of injury.
Loose clothing might be pulled by moving parts.

Recommended Oil
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Tech-nical Specifications” for further information.

Inspecting engine oil level
Proceed as follows:

Be sure the vehicle is on a level surface.
Warm up the engine to normal operatin g temperature.
Turn the engine off and wait at least fiv e minutes for the oil to return to the sump.
Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, an d reinsert it fully.
Engine Compartment
1. Engine Oil Dipstick
2. Engine Oil Cap
Pull the dipstick out again and examin e the level. The level is normal if it is between Low and Full. If it is near o r below Low, open the engine oil cap an d add enough oil to bring the level to Full.
NOTE:
Do not overfill the engine oil. This may caus e engine damage.
Make sure the O-ring on the dipstick i s positioned properly before reinserting the dipstick.
Reinsert the dipstick fully.

Engine Oil Consumption
During the initial period of use the engine oil consumption conditions should stabilize after the first 3,000 – 3,500 miles (5,000 –6,000 km).

Engine Coolant

WARNING

You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, d o not open the hood until the radiator ha s had time to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator o r coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The fan starts automatically and may start at any time , whether the engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead o r turn the ignition to the OFF mode. Th e fan is temperature controlled and ca n start at any time the ignition is in the O N mode.

Inspecting Coolant Level

NOTE:
Changing the coolant should be done by a n authorized dealer.
Inspect the antifreeze protection and coolant level in the coolant reservoir at least once a year, at the beginning of the winter season, and before traveling where temperatures ma y drop below freezing.
Inspect the condition and connections of all cooling system and heater hoses. Replace any that are worn or deteriorated.

WARNING

Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an over-heated engine. Heat causes pressure t o build up in the cooling system. T o prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.

The coolant should be at full in the radiator and between the F (Full) and L (Low) mark s on the coolant reservoir when the engine i s cool.

Coolant Reservoir

If it is at or near L (Low), add coolant b y mixing a minimum solution of 50% Mopar Long Life Coolant Concentrate for FIA T Spider. Use higher concentrations (not t o exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34° F (−37°C) are anticipated. Bring the level to F (Full). Please contact an authorized dealer for assistance. Securely tighten the coolant reservoir tan k cap after adding coolant.
If the coolant reservoir is empty or ne w coolant is required frequently, contact a n authorized dealer.

Brake/Clutch Fluid
Inspecting Brake/Clutch Fluid Level

The brakes and clutch draw fluid from the same reservoir.
Inspect the fluid level in the reservoir regularly.
It should be kept between the MAX and MIN lines.
The level normally drops with accumulated use, a condition associated wit h wear of brake and clutch linings. If it i s excessively low, have the brake/clutc h system inspected. Contact an authorize d dealer.

Brake Fluid Reservoir

WARNING

Use only manufacturer’s recommende d brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and/or impair it s performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified o n the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpect-edly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be take n to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could result in a collision.

Windshield And Headlight Washer Fluid

Inspecting Washer Fluid Level
Inspect fluid level in the washer fluid resevoir, open the cap and add fluid if necessary.

Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir

Use plain water if washer fluid is unavail-able. But use only washer fluid in col d weather to prevent it from freezing.

Automatic Transmission Control Unit
The transmission oil level should only b e checked at an authorized dealer.

Battery Maintenance
To get the best service from a battery:

Keep it securely mounted.
Keep the top clean and dry.
Keep terminals and connections clean , tight, and coated with petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
Rinse off spilled electrolyte immediately with a solution of water and baking soda.
If the vehicle will not be used for a n extended time, disconnect the battery leads and charge the battery every six weeks.

Battery Replacement
Contact an authorized dealer to purchase a replacement battery.

WARNING

Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and relate d accessories contain lead and lea d compounds. Wash hands after handling.

Pressure Washing

CAUTION
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure washer is not recommended . Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts and connections however, the pressures generated by these machines i s such that complete protection against water ingress cannot be guaranteed.

FAQs

What kind of oil is used in the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider’s engine?

Full synthetic 5W-30 engine oil is generally used in the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider.

How frequently should I have my engine oil changed?

Every 10,000 miles or every 12 months, whichever comes first, Fiat advises changing the engine oil. However, it’s wise to consult your owner’s manual for more detailed advice.

Can I use regular oil for synthetic oil?

Full synthetic oil is always recommended since it offers superior performance and protection, especially in high-performance engines like the 124 Spider’s.

What is the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider’s oil capacity?

With a filter replacement, the oil volume is normally in the range of 4.3 quarts (4.1 liters).

After an oil change, how do I reset the oil change indicator?

Through the settings menu of the car, you may typically reset the oil change indicator. For further information, consult your owner’s handbook.

What kind of antifreeze or coolant should I use?

Use a high-quality coolant with an ethylene glycol basis that is mixed 50/50 with purified water.

How frequently should the coolant level be checked?

Regularly check the coolant level, especially before lengthy excursions. It’s a good idea to check it every time you change the oil.

What transmission fluid is suggested for the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider?

For automatic transmissions and manual transmissions, the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider normally uses automatic transmission fluid (ATF). Consult your owner’s manual for detailed instructions.

How frequently should the transmission fluid be changed?

Transmission fluid should typically be changed every 30,000 to 60,000 miles for the majority of automobiles, though the intervals can vary. For further instructions, consult your owner’s handbook.

What brand of transmission fluid can I use?

Use transmission fluid that is suggested by Fiat or that adheres to the manufacturer’s requirements if possible.

What kind of braking fluid does a 2020 Fiat 124 Spider have?

DOT 4 brake fluid is generally used in the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider. To be sure, see your owner’s manual.

When ought I to replace my brake fluid?

The owner’s manual or every two years is the suggested time frame for changing the brake fluid.

Can I combine brake fluid from various brands?

It is not a good idea to combine brake fluid from several brands. Use only one brand and one kind of brake fluid.

What kind of fluid is used in the power steering system of the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider?

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is commonly used as power steering fluid in the 2020 Fiat 124 Spider. Check your owner’s manual to confirm this.

How frequently should I check the level of the power steering fluid?

Check the power steering fluid level frequently, and top it off as necessary. Although there is no set period, it is a good habit to check while performing routine maintenance.

Useful Links

View full PDF: 2020 Fiat 124 Spider User Manual
2020 Fiat 124 Spider Specifications Guidelines

Tags Engine Oil, Fiat, Fiat 124 Spider, Fluids

Fiat

2022 Fiat 500X Lights and Wipers Quick Guide

The 2022 Fiat 500X is a beautiful and small SUV that also has a number of high-tech features, like lighting and wiper systems, that improve safety and convenience. We’ll delve into the cutting-edge lighting and wiper technologies that set the 2022 Fiat 500X apart from competitors in this introduction. You’ll notice the 2022 Fiat 500X’s remarkable LED lighting signature as soon as you enter its planet. LED headlights in the front not only offer exceptional visibility for nighttime driving but also enhance the style of the car with a dash of contemporary elegance. By guaranteeing that you can see and be seen, even in the dark, these lights not only improve vision but also add to the overall safety of the vehicle. However, the lighting options for the Fiat 500X in 2022 go beyond just headlights. The car also has LED daytime running lights, which make it more visible throughout the day and give it a standout, memorable appearance on the road. The 500X also has LED taillights on the back, which not only increase safety but also add to the vehicle’s style and visibility, particularly when braking.

The 2022 Fiat 500X delivers when it comes to wipers. Rain-sensing wipers with its sophisticated wiper system have the ability to automatically change their speed and frequency in response to the intensity of rainfall. This means that regardless of the weather, you can focus on driving while the wipers take care of preserving clear visibility. In conclusion, the lighting and wiper systems on the 2022 Fiat 500X are more than just practical features; they also play a crucial role in the car’s convenience, fashion, and safety. The 2022 Fiat 500X makes sure you have the visibility you need and the style you want while driving day or night, in good weather or bad. Let’s examine these special features in more detail and see how they distinguish the 2022 Fiat 500X from other compact SUVs on the market.

EXTERIOR LIGHTS

HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel. The headlight switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, daytime running lights, fog lights and the dimming of the instrument cluster and interior lighting.

Headlight Switch

Rotate Headlight Control
Ambient Lighting Control (If Equipped)
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
Front Fog Light Switch (If Equipped)

Turning on the headlights will illuminate the instrument cluster and the controls located on the instrument panel.

NOTE:
On vehicles sold in Canada, both the rear position lights and Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will turn on when the headlight switch is rotated to the O (off) position.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) — IF EQUIPPED

The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs), if enabled through Uconnect Settings, will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position and the park brake is not applied.

NOTE:

For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime Running Lights will automatically deactivate when the front fog lights are turned on.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights may deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side of the vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on that side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when the hazard warning lights are activated).

HIGH BEAMS

To activate the high beam headlights, push the multifunction lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle), and an indicator will illuminate in the instrument cluster display.
To deactivate the high beam headlights, pull the multifunction lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle).

High Beam And Turn Signal Controls

NOTE:
The headlights must be on for the high beams to activate.

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLAMP CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the windshield. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.

NOTE:

The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be turned on or off through Uconnect Settings.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly.

FLASH-TO-PASS

You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain on, until the lever is released.

AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED

This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the last detent (AUTO position) for automatic headlight operation. To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position.

NOTE:
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN or START position before the headlights will come on in the automatic mode.

Light Sensor
The light sensor is equipped with an infrared LED, located on the windshield. It detects changes in light intensity outside the vehicle, based on the sensitivity of light set by using the menu on the display or on the Uconnect system. The higher the sensitivity, the lesser the amount of external light required for controlling the lighting.

PARKING LIGHTS

Rotate the headlight switch to the first position to turn on the parking lights. The parking light indicator in the cluster will illuminate.

HEADLIGHT TIME DELAY

This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area.
The time delay of the headlights is programmable between 0, 30, 60 and 90 seconds within Uconnect Settings.

Headlight Delay Activation
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the headlights within two minutes. The delay interval begins when the headlight switch is turned off.

Headlight Delay Deactivation
The feature is disabled by turning on the headlights, the parking lights or by placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
If you shut off the lights before the ignition is turned on, they will turn off in the normal manner.

NOTE:
The lights must be turned off within two minutes of placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this feature.

FRONT FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED

The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch.

Front Fog Light Switch

To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and push the fog light button on the headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, push the headlight switch a second time or turn off the headlight switch. An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the fog lights are turned on.

NOTE

The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on. Selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
The fog lights also function as cornering lights. Therefore there will be times when only one light is on.
If the ignition is placed in the OFF position with the fog lights on, they will remain on when the ignition is placed back in the ON/RUN position.
For vehicles sold in Canada, if the selector is moved to the parking lights position and the front fog lights are activated, the DRL will be deactivated and the front parking lights will be activated. Once the front fog lights are deactivated, the DRL will be activated again.

TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to activate the turn signals. The arrows on each side of the instrument cluster display flash to show proper operation.

LANE CHANGE ASSIST
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal will flash five times then automatically turn off.

COURTESY LIGHTS/APPROACHING LIGHTS
The courtesy lights feature allows you to activate the low beam, parking lights, and side marker lights for 25 seconds when the vehicle is unlocked. The courtesy lights feature can be activated or deactivated through the Uconnect Settings. When a door is open with the feature active, the activation of the lights is extended for 10 seconds. The feature is disabled when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.

INTERIOR LIGHTS

FRONT COURTESY LIGHT
The courtesy lights will automatically turn on when the door is open or closed. The light switches in the overhead console are for reading lamps.

Front Courtesy/Reading Lights

Courtesy/Reading Lights
Light Switches

Push the driver or passenger light switch to operate the reading lamps individually.

NOTE:

Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the interior lights are turned off. This will prevent the battery from discharging once the doors are closed.
If a light is left on it will automatically be turned off after approximately 15 minutes after the ignition is in the OFF position.

Dome Light Timing
The dome light will automatically illuminate when the doors are unlocked, the doors are opened or after the doors are closed.

Timing Entering The Vehicle
The dome lights illuminate in the following ways:

When the doors are unlocked, the dome light will illuminate for approximately 27 seconds.
When one of the doors is opened, the dome light will illuminate for approximately three minutes.
When the doors are closed, the dome light will automatically shut off after approximately 27 seconds.

NOTE:
The timing stops once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.

The dome light will turn off under any of the following conditions:

The dome light is disabled when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
The dome lights will turn off automatically when the doors are locked.
The dome lights will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes of inactivity to preserve the battery.

Timing Exiting The Vehicle
The dome light will illuminate under the following conditions when the ignition is placed in the OFF position:

The dome light will illuminate for 27 seconds after the key fob is removed from the vehicle.
The opening of one of the doors (approximately three minutes).
After closing a door (approximately 27 seconds).

The dome light timing is disabled when the doors are locked.

Dimmer Controls
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or downward to increase or decrease the brightness of the ambient light located in the overhead console, lower instrument panel lights, and cubby bin lights.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward or downward to increase or decrease the brightness of the instrument panel. At the top detent of the instrument panel dimmer, all the interior lights will also illuminate. At the bottom most setting of the thumb wheel, all the interior lights will be turned to their lowest dimmable setting.

Headlight Switch

Ambient Light Control (If Equipped)
Instrument Panel Dimmer

Rear Dome Light — If Equipped
Push the switch on the rear dome light once to turn the light on, the light will remain on at all times. Push the switch a second time to turn the light off, the light will remain off until a door is opened.

Rear Dome Light On/Off Switch

Retractable Roof Lights
For vehicles equipped with a retractable roof, there are two interior lights located below the grab handles of the rear doors.
The lights come on by opening any of the doors.

CARGO AREA LIGHTS

An interior light is located on the left side panel in the cargo area.
This light automatically turns on/off when the liftgate is opened and closed, regardless of the position of the ignition.

NOTE:
In order to preserve the life of the battery, the light will turn off after 15 minutes.

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the lever on the right side of the steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located on the end of the lever.

Windshield Wiper Lever

Push Forward For Rear Washer
Rotate For Rear Wiper Operation
Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
Pull For Front Washer
Push Up For Mist

CAUTION
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the “park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park” position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.

WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION

Rotate the windshield wiper knob to one of the first two detent positions for intermittent settings, the third detent for low wiper operation and the fourth for high wiper operation.

Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold. If the lever is pulled while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected. If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off position, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn off.

WARNING
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use.

Mist
Push the lever upward to the Mist position and release for a single wiping cycle.

NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield. The washer function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement.

RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED

This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of two detent positions for intermittent settings to activate this feature.

NOTE:
If the windshield wiper lever is rotated from the O (off) position to the first intermittent setting or from the first intermittent setting to the second inter-mittent setting, the wipers will perform an imme-diate wipe cycle to clean the windshield.

Rain Sensor Location
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the windshield wiper lever. Wiper delay position one is the least sensitive, and wiper delay position two is the most sensitive. Place the wiper switch in the O (off) position when not using the system.

NOTE

The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the windshield.
Products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off through Uconnect Settings.

The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the following conditions:

Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position, the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the ignition is in the ON/RUN position, and the automatic transmission is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped with the Remote Start system, Rain Sensing wipers are not operational when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, rain sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and no other inhibit conditions exist.
Rain Sensing Wipers — Inhibition — When the user changes the ignition position from OFF to ON/RUN with the windshield wiper lever already in the intermittent position, no wipe cycle is performed for safety reasons. This temporary inhibition avoids accidental activations of the wiping (e.g. during the hand washing of the windshield, blocking the blades in ice/snow conditions).

The user can activate the Rain Sensing Wipers in three ways:

Moving the lever from the O (off) position to the intermittent positions.
One Mist command actuation.
The vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h) and the rain sensor detects the presence of rain.

REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER

The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the windshield wiper lever on the right side of the steering column. The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch, located at the middle of the lever.

NOTE:
If the front wiper is moving and the vehicle is shifted in REVERSE, the rear wiper will perform one round up to clean the rear window.

Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the first detent for intermittent operation and to the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
To use the washer, push the lever forward and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting, the wiper will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the end of the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.

NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the switch is held for more than 30 seconds. Once the lever is released, the pump will resume normal operation.

If the lever is pushed while the wiper is in the off position, the wiper will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn off.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the wiper will automatically return to the “park” position.

CAUTION
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements:

Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

WINDSHIELD WIPER DE-ICER — IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield Wiper De-Icer feature that may be activated under the following conditions:

Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield Wiper De-Icer will be activated automatically when the rear defrost is turned on and the ambient temperature is below 40°F (4.4°C).
Activation By Remote Start Operation — When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient temperature is less than 40°F (4.4°C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote Start will resume its previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will continue.

FAQs

How can I turn on my 2022 Fiat 500X’s headlights?

Simply move the headlight switch to the proper position on the left side of the steering column to turn on the headlights.

What variations of headlight mode are there?

There are normally settings for parking lights, low beams, and high beams on the 2022 Fiat 500X.

How can I turn on my high beams?

To use the high beams, turn the headlight switch away from you. To turn them off, pull it back in your direction.

Can I always use the high beams?

Only use high lights when there is no oncoming traffic, and switch to low beams when you are close to other vehicles.

How do I use the wipers on my windshield?

Utilize the wiper stalk located on the steering column’s right side. Toggle it down to adjust the wiper speed, then push it up to perform a single wipe.

Why is the intermittent wiper setting there?

The windshield can be automatically cleaned at regular intervals when the wipers are set to intermittent. You may use the stalk to change the delay time.

How do I turn on the wiper for the back windshield?

To use the rear windshield wiper, turn the wiper stalk to the “R” position.

Can I change the rain-sensing wipers’ sensitivity?

If your 2022 Fiat 500X has rain-sensing wipers, you can change their sensitivity in the settings menu of the car.

How can I make the fluid in the windshield washers work?

While the wipers are operating, press the button at the end of the wiper stalk to spray windshield washer fluid over the windshield.

What should I do if my windshield wipers are noisy or aren’t efficiently wiping the glass?

Look for damage on the wiper blades, and replace them if necessary. Make sure the windshield is also spotless and debris-free.

The 2022 Fiat 500X has automated headlights, right?

Some Fiat 500X trim levels for 2022 might have automated headlights that turn on and off in response to the surrounding lighting.

Why don’t the fog lights come on?

The fog lights can be turned on by turning the headlight switch to the “Fog Lights” position, but they must only be used when it is foggy or low visibility.

Can I manually change the Fiat 500X’s headlight aim in 2022?

Usually set at the factory, the headlights shouldn’t need to be adjusted manually. Consult your owner’s handbook or a dealership, though, if you think there may be an alignment issue.

What should I do if my headlights are malfunctioning or flickering?

It is advised to have your headlights checked out and fixed by a skilled expert if you are having problems with them.

How frequently do my headlights and taillights need to get new bulbs?

Although the periods between bulb replacements can vary, it’s a good idea to frequently check your lights and replace any burned-out ones to preserve the best visibility and safety. Consult your owner’s manual for detailed instructions.

Useful Link

View full pdf: 2022 Fiat 500X User Manual
2022 Fiat 500X Seats Setup Instructions

Tags Fiat, Fiat 2022, Fiat 500X, Lights and Wipers

Fiat

2022 Fiat 500X Alarm System Quick Guide

The 2022 Fiat 500X Alarm System comes as a cutting-edge solution to secure your vehicle and peace of mind in a constantly changing environment where safety and security are important. This cutting-edge alarm system, which was created to address the needs of contemporary drivers, sets a new benchmark for car security. A sophisticated network of sensors and technology, painstakingly designed to defend your precious item, is at the core of the 2022 Fiat 500X Alarm System. This alarm system is your watchful guardian, adding an added degree of security whether you’re driving through busy city streets or parking in a quiet suburban area.

The 2022 Fiat 500X Alarm System’s user-friendly interface makes it simple for all drivers to operate. It’s simple to set up and modify your security choices, providing you control over the degree of security you want. The 2022 Fiat 500X Alarm System delivers invaluable peace of mind in addition to its technical prowess. You may feel secure knowing that your car is secured, whether you’re parking in a strange place or just want an added layer of security. The 2022 Fiat 500X Alarm System establishes a new standard for vehicle security in a world where security is of the utmost importance. This alarm system is more than simply a feature; with its extensive sensor array, real-time alerts, remote control capabilities, anti-theft technology, user-friendly interface, and the utmost peace of mind, it is a promise of security for your Fiat 500X in a constantly changing world.

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle doors, hood, liftgate, and the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security system is armed, interior switches for door locks and liftgate release are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security system will provide the following audible and visible signals:

The horn will pulse
The turn signals will flash
The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash

TO ARM THE SYSTEM

Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security system:

Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF position.
Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle:
1. Push the lock button on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.
2. Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry door handle with a valid key fob avail-able in the same exterior zone
3. Push the lock button on the key fob.
If any doors are open, close them.

TO DISARM THE SYSTEM

The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any of the following methods:.

Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock the door Ú page 23.
Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to disarm the system.

NOTE

The driver’s door key cylinder cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security system.
The Vehicle Security system remains armed during liftgate entry. If someone enters the vehicle through the opened liftgate, then opens any door, the alarm will sound.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.

The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect your vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security system will arm, regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.

DISABLING

To completely disable the alarm (e.g. in the case of long inactivity of the car), lock the doors by turning the emergency key in the exterior door lock cylinder.

NOTE:
If the batteries in the key fob discharge in the event of a failure to the system or to switch off the alarm, place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.

FAQs

What kind of alarm system is installed in the 2022 Fiat 500X?

An anti-theft alarm system is pre-installed in the 2022 Fiat 500X.

How can I set my Fiat 500X’s alarm system to go off?

When you use the key fob or the interior lock button to lock your car, the alarm system is instantly triggered.

What sets off the Fiat 500X’s alarm system?

Unauthorized entrance, such as attempting to unlock a door or the trunk without the right key or key fob, sets off the alarm system.

If I don’t want the alarm to go off, can I turn it off?

You are unable to turn off the alarm system. It is a commonplace security measure.

What occurs when the alarm is set off?

The car’s horn and lights will flash when the alarm goes off to call attention to the vehicle.

If I mistakenly set off the alarm, how can I temporarily stop it?

Pressing the unlock button on your key fob will turn off the alarm.

Will the alarm system deter theft of the actual vehicle?

Yes, the alarm system is intended to thwart burglaries and safeguard your car.

Can I change the alarm system’s sensitivity?

The manufacturer has pre-set the alarm system’s sensitivity, and the owner cannot change it.

Is there a panic button on the key fob that can be used to manually set off the alarm?

Yes, the panic button on the majority of Fiat 500X key fobs can be used to sound the alarm in an emergency.

Can I get alerts on my phone when the alarm goes off?

Some versions can allow you to link to a smartphone app for remote monitoring, however this capability might call for extra supplies or monthly fees.

What should I do if my alarm accidently goes off in a public area?

To turn off the alarm and stop bothering others, unlock the car as soon as possible using your key fob.

Is the vehicle’s warranty valid for the alarm system?

For warranty information relevant to your model and location, it is recommended to refer to your owner’s manual or get in touch with your local Fiat dealership.

If the alarm goes off a lot, would it drain the battery of the car?

The battery life of the automobile shouldn’t be greatly impacted by the alarm system because it is built to minimize battery drain during activation.

Can I upgrade the alarm system with aftermarket security features?

You can certainly add aftermarket security features or gadgets, but take care not to violate your car’s warranty or introduce unanticipated problems.

How can I fix any problems with my 2022 Fiat 500X’s alarm system?

Consult your owner’s manual for troubleshooting instructions if the alarm system is giving you issues, or get help from your local Fiat dealership.

Useful Links

View full pdf: 2022 Fiat 500X User Manual
2022 Fiat 500X Keys and Smart Key Setup Guide

Tags Alarm System, Fiat, Fiat 2022, Fiat 500X

Fiat

2022 Fiat 500X Keys and Smart Key Setup Guide

With its cutting-edge key and smart key technologies, the 2022 Fiat 500X delivers a new level of ease and security. Fiat has adopted cutting-edge critical solutions to improve the ownership experience of their 500X model in an era where automotive innovation is continually redefining the driving experience. The 2022 Fiat 500X puts an end to searching for conventional keys and stressing over locking yourself out of your car. With its sleek and contemporary smart key system, this small crossover SUV embraces the future and raises the bar for usability and technological sophistication. We’ll examine the key and smart key features of the 2022 Fiat 500X in this article, looking at how these advancements offer drivers convenience, security, and peace of mind. The 2022 Fiat 500X’s primary technology promises to take your driving experience to a whole new level, whether you’re a tech-savvy enthusiast or just searching for a more effective method to connect with your car.

Many smart keys allow you to remotely start your vehicle, which can be very helpful in severe weather situations. Keyless entry alarms also come with many smart keys. They also offer peace of mind even while you are far from your car by sending notifications via the key or a connected smartphone app if your vehicle is tampered with. To further increase security, some high-tech smart keys are fitted with biometric features like fingerprint identification. Only authorized people will be able to access and operate the car thanks to these features. In conclusion, the key and smart key technology in the 2022 Fiat 500X are at the cutting edge of automotive innovation and provide a balance of convenience and security that enhances driving pleasure and reduces anxiety. The 2022 Fiat 500X’s main technology sets the bar for contemporary automotive convenience and safety, whether you’re a tech fanatic or just seeking for a smarter way to connect with your car.

KEYS

KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), and Remote Start (if equipped). The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m). The key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. The key fob also contains an emergency key, which is stored in the rear of the key fob.

NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if the key fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other electronic device. This may result in poor performance.

Keyless Ignition Key Fob

Unlock
Emergency Key
Lock
Remote Start
PANIC

In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be verified by referring to the instrument cluster, which will display directions to follow.

To Unlock/Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice within five seconds to unlock all the doors and the liftgate. To lock all the doors and the liftgate, push the lock button once. When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will flash and the illuminated entry system will be activated. When the doors are locked, the turn signals will flash and the horn will chirp (if programmed in the Uconnect system).

NOTE:
If the vehicle is unlocked by a key fob, and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will relock and if equipped, the security system will arm.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first push of the unlock button within Uconnect Settings.

Key Left Vehicle Feature — If Equipped
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the vehicle while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the ON/RUN or START position, the message “Key Fob Has Left The Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster display along with an interior chime. An exterior audible and visual alert will also be activated to warn the driver. The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times along with a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior lights.

NOTE:

The doors have to be open and then closed in order for the vehicle to check for the presence of a key fob; the Key Left Vehicle feature will not activate until all of the doors are closed.
These alerts will not be activated in situations where the vehicle’s engine is left running with the key fob inside.

Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery.

NOTE:

Customers are recommended to use a battery obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin battery dimensions may not meet the original OEM coin battery dimensions.
Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-ouswaste/perchlorate for further information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board.
Remove the emergency key (2) by sliding the emergency key release (1) on the back of the key fob and pulling the emergency key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
1. Emergency Key Release Button
2. Emergency Key
Separate the key fob halves using a #2 flat blade screwdriver or a coin, and gently pry the two halves of the key fob apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during removal.
Emergency Key RemovalSeparating Case With A CoinKey Fob Battery Replacement
Remove the back cover to access and replace the battery. When replacing the battery, match the (+) sign on the battery to the (+) sign on the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterio-ration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves together.

WARNING

The integrated key fob contains a coin cell battery. Do not ingest the battery; there is a chemical burn hazard. If the coin cell battery is swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns in just two hours and can lead to death.
If you think a battery may have been swal-lowed or placed inside any part of the body, seek immediate medical attention.
Keep new and used batteries away from chil-dren. If the battery compartment does not close securely, stop using the product and keep it away from children.

Programming And Requesting Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an authorized dealer.

NOTE:

Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.

WARNING

Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™, always remember to place the ignition in the OFF position.

Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one that has never been programmed.

NOTE:

When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to match the vehicle locks.

SENTRY KEY

The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked. The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an incorrect key fob is used to start the engine.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid key fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds. If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer.

CAUTION
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket Remote Start systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection.

All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.

IGNITION SWITCH

KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has three operating positions. These positions are OFF, ON, and RUN.

START/STOP Ignition Button

The push button ignition can be placed in the following positions:

OFF

The engine is stopped.
No electrical devices are available.

The vehicle is not running.
Some electrical devices (power locks, alarm, etc.) are still available.

RUN

Driving mode.
All electrical devices are available (e.g. climate controls, heated seats, etc.).

NOTE:
The vehicle will not start if the key fob is located inside the cargo area and the liftgate is opened.

Backup Starting Method

NOTE:
If the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or depleted battery. In this situation, a backup method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the key fob against the START/STOP ignition button and push to operate the ignition switch.

WARNING

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition in the ON or RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

NOTE:
For more information on proper engine starting procedures,

REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED

This system uses the key fob to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of approximately 328 ft (100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in all ambient conditions before the driver enters the vehicle.

NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may reduce this range.

WARNING

Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death.

HOW TO USE REMOTE START

Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle. Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts the engine off.

With Remote Start, the engine will only run for 15 minutes.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
The parking lights will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN posi-tion before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated for a third cycle.

All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start:

Gear Selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Liftgate closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
PANIC button not pushed
System not disabled from previous Remote Start event
Vehicle Security Light flashing
Ignition in OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
Vehicle Security system is not signaling an intrusion
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illuminated

WARNING

Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death.

TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE

To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start system, push and release the START/STOP ignition button while pressing the brake pedal prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off with another push and release of the Remote Start button on the key fob, or if the engine is allowed to run for the entire 15 minute cycle. Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the climate controls will resume the previously set operations (temperature, blower control, etc.).

NOTE

For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start Active — Push Start Button” will display in the instrument cluster display until you push the START/STOP ignition button.
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will disable for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request.

REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED

When Remote Start is active, and the outside ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the system will automatically activate front defrost for 15 minutes or less. The timing is dependent on the ambient temperature. Once the timer expires, the system will automatically adjust the settings depending on ambient conditions. See “Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the next section for detailed operation.

REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED

When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear defrost will automatically turn on in cold weather. The heated steering wheel and driver heated seat feature will turn on if selected in the comfort menu screen within Uconnect Settings Ú page 128. The vehicle will adjust the climate control settings depending on the outside ambient temperature.

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped
The climate controls will be automatically adjusted to the optimal temperature and mode settings depending on the outside ambient temperature. This will occur until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position where the climate controls will resume their previous settings.

Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped

In ambient temperatures at 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the climate settings will default to maximum heat, with fresh air entering the cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to 78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be based on the last settings selected by the driver.
In ambient temperatures at 78°F (26°C) or above, the climate settings will default to MAX A/C, Bi-Level Mode, with Recirculation on.

For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate control settings.

NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of Remote Start until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. The climate control settings will change if manually adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is in Remote Start mode, and exit automatic override. This includes the OFF button on the climate controls, which will turn the system off.

REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER DE-ICER AND REAR DEFROST ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient temperature is less than 40°F (4.4°C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote Start will resume its previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will continue.

REMOTE START CANCEL MESSAGE — IF EQUIPPED
The following messages will display in the instrument cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits Remote Start prematurely:

Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Cancelled — Liftgate Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Too Cold
Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset

The message will stay active until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.

FAQs

What kinds of keys are offered for the Fiat 500X in 2022?

Both conventional physical keys and electronic ones are available for the 2022 Fiat 500X.

How does a smart key operate and what is it?

A keyless entry device known as a smart key enables you to start and unlock your automobile without actually inserting a key. It interacts with the car using radio frequency transmission.

How can I use the smart key to open the doors?

The doors of your locked Fiat 500X will automatically unlock when you approach it holding the smart key in your pocket or purse.

Can I use the smart key to start the engine?

Yes, you may start the engine by first pressing the brake pedal and then using the smart key inside the car to hit the engine start button.

What should I do if the battery in the smart key runs out or is dead?

By pushing the brake pedal and keeping the smart key close to the engine start button, you can still start the vehicle.

Is it possible for me to change the smart key’s battery?

The smart key battery may usually be changed by the user. For instructions and information on the proper battery, go to your owner’s manual.

Can a spare smart key be programmed for my Fiat 500X?

If you want to program a spare smart key for your car, you might need to go to a Fiat dealership or a professional locksmith.

What should I do if my smart key gets lost?

For assistance, speak with your neighborhood Fiat dealership. They can assist you in getting a spare key and programming it for your car.

Can I have a certain number of smart keys for my Fiat 500X?

The maximum number of smart keys that can be programmed to your car is detailed in your owner’s manual.

What does the smart key’s emergency key blade serve?

In the event that the smart key battery dies, you can physically open the doors and enter your vehicle using the emergency key blade.

Do I have to carry about the emergency key blade at all times?

Although it’s a good idea to keep the emergency key blade in a secure location, if your smart key is working properly, you might not frequently need it.

Is it possible to temporarily turn off the smart key system?

For information on how to disable the smart key system, which may be advantageous in some circumstances, consult your owner’s handbook.

Can I set up several preferences for every smart key that is used with the vehicle?

Yes, you can often preset various user preferences, such as seat placements and climate settings, for each smart key.

What should I do if the smart key is malfunctioning?

For troubleshooting instructions if you’re having problems with the smart key, refer to your owner’s handbook. Call a Fiat repair center if issues continue.

Is it possible to unintentionally lock the smart key inside the vehicle?

Although the majority of contemporary smart key systems feature protections to prevent the key from being locked inside the car, it’s always a good idea to check again just in case.

Useful Links

View full pdf: 2022 Fiat 500X User Manual
2022 Fiat 500X Instrument Panel Guide

Tags Fiat, Fiat 500X, Keys, Smart Key

Fiat

2022 Fiat 500X Instrument Panel Guide

The instrument panel of the 2022 Fiat 500X is a prominent component of this fashionable small SUV because it brilliantly combines contemporary technology, ergonomic design, and Italian flair. We shall examine the essential components that make the instrument panel of the 2022 Fiat 500X a spectacular and useful focal point for both drivers and passengers in this introduction. Your eyes are pulled to the instrument panel, which acts as the brain of the car, as soon as you step inside the 2022 Fiat 500X. The panel’s harmonic design of form and function allows for the seamless integration of cutting-edge technology and simple controls into a beautiful layout. A colorful and high-resolution touchscreen infotainment system takes center stage in the instrument panel and offers a range of options to keep you connected and entertained while driving. This system puts the entire world at your fingertips with ease and convenience, from voice commands and music streaming to navigation and smartphone connectivity.

A stylish and driver-focused digital instrument cluster with real-time data on speed, fuel consumption, navigational instructions, and more can be found beneath the touchscreen for the driver. You can customize the information’s presentation to suit your preferences, ensuring that the information you require is directly in your line of sight. The instrument panel’s ergonomics were created for optimal comfort and accessibility. Fiat has designed an atmosphere that emanates both functionality and refinement through strategically placed controls, user-friendly button layouts, and premium materials. Every component of the panel displays the brand’s dedication to workmanship through the use of premium materials and close attention to detail. In summary, the 2022 Fiat 500X’s instrument panel is more than simply a dashboard; it’s a command center that improves your driving experience. With its seamless integration of technology, aesthetics, and user-friendly design, the 2022 Fiat 500X sets the stage for a trip where form meets function, making every drive enjoyable and connected.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY

The vehicle is equipped with multi functional instrument cluster display which offers useful information to the driver. With the ignition in the OFF position (and the key removed, for vehicles with a mechanical key), opening/closing of a door will activate the instrument cluster display for viewing, and display the total miles or kilometers in the odometer. The instrument cluster display is designed to display important information about the vehicle’s systems and features. Using a driver interactive display located on the instrument panel, your instrument cluster display can show you how systems are working and give you warnings when they aren’t. The steering wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll through and enter the main menus and submenus. You can access the specific information you want and make selections and adjustments.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY CONTROL BUTTONS

The system allows the driver to select information by pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel:

Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons

Left Arrow Button
Up Arrow Button
Right Arrow Button
Down Arrow Button
OK Button

The instrument cluster display features a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster. Pushing the controls on the left side of the steering wheel allows the driver to select vehicle information and Personal Settings.

Push the back/left arrow button to access the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item.
Push the up arrow button to scroll upward through the main menus and submenus (Speedometer, Trip, Drive Mode Selector, Vehicle Info, Driver Assist, Audio, Phone, Navigation, Messages, Settings).
Push the right arrow button to access the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item.
Push the down arrow button to scroll down-ward through the main menu and submenus (Speedometer, Trip, Drive Mode Selector, Vehicle Info, Driver Assist, Audio, Phone, Naviga-tion, Messages, Settings).
Push the OK button to access/select the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. Push and hold the OK button for two seconds to reset displayed/selected features that can be reset.

ENGINE OIL CHANGE RESET — IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Change Engine Oil” message will display in the instrument cluster display. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the following procedure.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do not start the engine).
Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly, three times, within 10 seconds.
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.

NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MAIN MENU

The Main Menu is composed of several options that can be selected using the control buttons above.

NOTE:

 The display mode of the menu items varies depending on the type of display.
 For some items, a submenu is provided.
 In the Uconnect system, some items on the menu are not shown on the instrument cluster display Ú page 66.

Instrument Cluster Display Menu/Submenu Items
The Menu is composed of the following items:

Speedometer
Trip
1. Instantaneous Info
2. Trip A
3. Trip B
Drive Mode Selector — If Equipped
1. Auto Mode
2. Sport Mode
3. All Weather Mode
Vehicle Info
1. Tire Pressure
2. Oil Temperature
3. Battery Voltage
Driver Assist — If Equipped
1. Lane Departure Warning
2. Adaptive Cruise Control
Stop/Start — If Equipped
Audio
Navigation — If Equipped
Messages
Settings— If Equipped
1. Display
2. Units
3. Clock and Date
4. Security
5. Safety & Assistance
6. Lights
7. Doors & Locks
8. Engine OFF Procedure

Speedometer
View and change the speedometer scale from mph to km/h (km/h to mph).

Trip
This instrument cluster display menu item allows you to view and select information about the “Trip Computer”:

Instantaneous info
1. View the distance to empty (miles or km).
2. View the instantaneous consumption (mpg, or l/ 100km or km/l).
Trip A
1. View Trip A distance (miles or km).
2. View travel time A (hours/minutes/ seconds).
3. View average consumption A (mpg, or l/ 100km or km/l).
4. View average speed A (mph or km/h).
Trip B
1. View Trip B distance (miles or km).
2. View travel time B (hours/minutes/seconds).
3. View average consumption B (mpg, or l/ 100km or km/l).
4. View average speed B (mph or km/h).

Drive Mode Selector
This instrument cluster display menu/submenu items allows you to view and select information about the “Drive Mode”.

Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button until “Vehicle Info” is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the right arrow button and Coolant Temp will be displayed. Push the right or left arrow button to scroll through the following information displays:

Tire pressure
1. View the information relating to the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (if equipped).
Oil Temperature
1. View the engine oil temperature.
Battery Voltage
1. View the voltage value (state of charge) of the battery.

Driver Assist — If Equipped
This menu item allows you to change the settings (Notice LaneSense and Intensity LaneSense) relating to the LaneSense system (if equipped):

Notice LaneSense
By selecting this function, you can select the “readiness” of LaneSense, choosing between the options “Near,” “Medium,” or “Far.”
Intensity LaneSense
Using this function, you can select the force applied to the steering wheel to keep the car in the roadway through the electrical drive system due to LaneSense.

Stop/Start – If Equipped
Automatically stops the engine during a vehicle stop under the right conditions to reduce fuel consumption.
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Stop/Start menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster. This menu shows messages related to Stop/Start. Only one message can be viewed at a time until the condition is cleared. When the Stop/Start is engaged (and the engine is off), the associated hardware indicator light is turned on. When the Stop/Start button on the central stack is pushed, a Stop/Start status message will appear in the instrument cluster display.

Audio
This menu item allows you to view the instrument cluster display and the information present on the display of the Uconnect system.

The information displayed is:

“Radio (AM or FM)”: view Radio Station Name (if equipped), frequency, and graphical icon.
MP3: title display or song number playing.
USB: title display or song number playing.
Ipod: display the song title and graphic element.
Bluetooth®: displays the song title and a graphic element.
SAT: displays the station name and a graphic element.
APP: displays strings and a graphic element.

Navigation — If Equipped
If activated, this menu item will display navigation status and directions.

Messages (Stored)
This menu item allows you to display the information messages/malfunction stored.
The background color of the display varies according to the priorities of the failure:

Failed Messages with low priority display in yellow.
Failed Messages with high priority display in red.

Settings — If Equipped
This menu item allows you to change the settings for the following:

Display
Units
Clock and Date
Security
Safety and Assistance
Lights
Doors and Locks
Engine OFF Procedure

Display
By selecting “Display,” you can access the following settings:

Screen Setup: Allows you to configure the display screen.
Language: Allows you to select the language in which to display the information/warnings.
Automatic Reset Trip B: Allows you to set the options to reset the Trip B (never, always, every two hours or every eight hours).
Phone Repetition: Allows you to select “On” or “Off”. The instrument cluster display can also display the information concerning phone mode. The information that can be displayed is the connection status of the mobile phone (phone connected or disconnected), the active telephone calls/incoming/on hold, and the management of double calls (first incoming second waiting, etc.).
Navigation Repetition: Allows you to select “On” or “Off” on the instrument cluster display, infor-mation relating to the navigation mode.

Units
By selecting the item “Units Of Measure,” you can select the unit of measure used in the display.

Possible options are:

US
Metric
Custom

Clock And Date
By selecting the item “clock and date,” you can adjust the clock.

Possible options are:

Set Time: Adjust hours/minutes.
Set Format: Adjust the time format “12h” (12 hours) or “24h” (24 hours).
Set Date: Adjust day/month/year.

Security
By selecting the item “Security,” you can make the following adjustments:

Speed Warning: Set the vehicle speed limit (mph or km/h), which the driver is notified through a visual and acoustic signaling (display of a message and a symbol on the display).
Seat Belt Buzzer: This function is only viewable when the Seat Belt Reminder (SBR) system is active.
Hill Start Assist: Activation/Deactivation of the Hill Start Assist system.

Safety And Assistance
By selecting the item “Safety & Assistance,” you can make the following adjustments:

Full Brake Control: A selection of operating modes of the Full Brake Control system.
Full Brake Control Sensitivity: A selection of the “readiness” of intervention of the Full Brake Control system, based on the distance to the obstacle.
Park Assist: A selection of the type of information provided by Park Assist.
Park Assist Vol.: A selection of the volume of acoustic signals provided by Park Assist.
Rain Sensing Wipers: Enabling/disabling the automatic operation of wipers in the event of rain.
LaneSense Warning — If Equipped: A selection of the “readiness” of intervention of LaneSense.
Warning Buzzer Volume: Increase or decrease the volume of the buzzer by selecting “Low”, “Medium”, or “High”.
Maintenance Brakes — If Equipped: Activation of the procedure to carry out braking system maintenance.
Auto Park Brake — If Equipped: Enable/disable auto-insertion of the Electric Parking Brake.

Lights
By selecting the item “Lights,” you can make the following adjustments:

Headlight Off Delay: Set the delay for headlight shutoff after engine shutoff.
Headlight Sensitivity: Adjust the sensitivity of headlight brightness.
Interior Ambient Lights: Increase or decrease the brightness of the Interior Ambient Lights.
Greeting Lights: Enable/disable the vehicle’s Greeting Lights.
Auto High Beam: Activate/deactivate the automatic main beam headlights — If Equipped.
Daytime Lights: Activate/deactivate the daytime running lights.
Cornering Lights: Activate/deactivate the cornering lights — If Equipped.

Doors And Locks
By selecting the item “Doors & Locks,” you can make the following adjustments:

Auto Door Lock: Activate/deactivate the automatic locking of the doors with the vehicle moving.
Auto Unlock On Exit: Automatic unlocking of the doors when exiting the vehicle.
Flash Light With Lock: Activate the direction indicators when closing the doors.
Sound Horn With Lock: Activate/deactivate the horn when pushing the lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry. The options are “Off,” “First Press,” and “Second Press.”
Horn With Remote Start: Activate/deactivate the horn at the Remote Starting of the engine with the Remote Keyless Entry.
Remote Door Unlock Without Passive Entry: Allows you to choose whether to unlock all the doors or only the driver’s side door on the first push of the unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry.
Door Unlock With Passive Entry: Allows you to open the driver door only on the first push of the unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry or using the passive entry handles on the doors or liftgates.
Passive Entry — If Equipped: Activate the automatic locking of the doors.
Engine OFF Procedure — If Equipped: Allows you to turn off the engine from the instrument cluster in the event of an ignition switch failure. Instructions for turning off the engine via the instrument cluster display controls will display in the instrument cluster.

FAQs

What kind of instrument panel is on the Fiat 500X in 2022?

The Fiat 500X of 2022 is furnished with a contemporary digital instrument panel.

Can I customize the instrument panel?

It is true that you can customize the information displayed on the instrument panel.

How can I modify the data shown on the instrument panel?

Using the controls on the steering wheel, you can modify the information that is presented.

On what kind of information is the instrument panel displayed?

Important details including speed, fuel level, temperature, and navigation instructions are shown on the instrument panel.

Is there a digital speedometer on it?

A digital speedometer is present on the instrument panel of the 2022 Fiat 500X.

Can I use my smartphone to make calls and connect to navigation on the instrument panel?

Yes, you may connect your smartphone to the instrument panel to use it for hands-free calling and navigation.

What security components are built into the instrument panel?

For safety features like lane departure warning and blind-spot monitoring, the instrument panel may show alerts and warnings.

Is the instrument panel equipped with a night mode?

Yes, there is usually a night option on the instrument panel to lessen glare and enhance vision when driving at night.

How can I change the instrument panel’s brightness?

Through the settings menu of the car, you can change the instrument panel’s brightness.

Is there a trip computer on the instrument panel?

Yes, it frequently comes with a trip computer that offers details on fuel economy and trip data.

Can I use the instrument panel to access the vehicle’s diagnostics?

Yes, some diagnostic data, such as tire pressure and maintenance reminders, may be displayed on the instrument panel.

What types of controls for audio are there on the instrument panel?

Through the instrument panel, you may modify audio settings, switch tracks, and change the volume.

Is it possible to clear the trip data displayed on the instrument panel?

Yes, you can use the settings menu to reset travel statistics and other information.

Are voice commands supported by the instrument panel?

For some features visible on the instrument panel, some models might support voice commands.

Can I change the display settings on the instrument panel?

You can choose the information that is most important to you while driving by often switching between several display modes.

Useful Links

View full pdf: 2022 Fiat 500X User Manual
2022 Fiat 500X Transmission Guide

Tags Fiat, Fiat 2022, Fiat 500X, Instrument panel

Fiat

2022 Fiat 500X Transmission Guide

In the world of compact crossovers, the 2022 Fiat 500X symbolizes a remarkable advancement, fusing Italian design, functionality, and performance into one alluring package. The 2022 Fiat 500X is ready to win over drivers looking for a sporty and adaptable vehicle with its distinctive design, cutting-edge technology, and a variety of amazing features. The 2022 Fiat 500X will be covered in detail in this introduction, including its eye-catching design, state-of-the-art interior comforts, and powerful performance capabilities. Join us as we investigate what sets this compact crossover apart in the increasingly competitive automobile market.

The 2022 Fiat 500X places a high premium on safety and has a number of cutting-edge safety features and driver assistance systems. This crossover is outfitted to keep you and your passengers safe on every trip, including automated emergency braking, lane departure warning, and adaptive cruise control. In conclusion, people looking for a small crossover with modern technology, versatility, and style should strongly consider the 2022 Fiat 500X. It’s a car that promises to make every drive a special experience with its striking design, well-appointed interior, and powerful performance. The 2022 Fiat 500X is prepared to give a blend of fun and practicality whether you’re navigating city streets or going on a weekend trip.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK.
The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both beside the gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To select a gear range, push the lock button on the gear selector and move the lever rearward or forward. You must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK (or NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds). Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.

WARNING

It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmis-sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-dren to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the ON or RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

CAUTION

Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

GEAR SELECTOR

The transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (+/-) shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control. Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the AutoStick position (beside the DRIVE position) will manually select the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.

NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward) it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental and road conditions. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers).

The 9-speed transmission has been developed to meet the needs of current and future FWD/AWD vehicles. Software and calibration is refined to optimize the customer’s driving experience and fuel economy. By design, some vehicle and driveline combinations utilize 9th gear only in very specific driving situations and conditions.

Gear Selector Lock Button

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears.
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.

CAUTION
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold.

GEAR RANGES

PARK (P)
The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
When parking on a hill, apply the EPB before shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.

When exiting the vehicle, always:

Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the engine off.
Remove the key fob.

WARNING

Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the transmission gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the ON or RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

CAUTION

Before moving the transmission gear selector out of PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain.

The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK position:

When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the gear selector, and firmly move the gear selector all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated.
Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not blinking.
With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector will not move out of PARK.

REVERSE (R)

This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

NEUTRAL (N)

Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine may be started in this range. Apply the Electric Park Brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the vehicle.

WARNING
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.

CAUTION
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage.
For Recreational Towing.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle.

DRIVE (D)

This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds or while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.

If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the transmission controller may modify the transmission shift schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating. If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the Transmission Temperature Warning Light may illuminate and the transmission may operate differently until the transmission cools down. During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter clutch, and shifts into EIGHTH or NINTH gear, are inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.

AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control, giving you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can also provide you with more control during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing and many other situations.

Operation
When the gear selector is in the AutoStick position (beside the DRIVE position), it can be moved forward and rearward. This allows the driver to manually select the transmission gear being used. Moving the gear selector forward (-) triggers a downshift, and rearward (+) an upshift. The current gear is displayed in the instrument cluster.

NOTE:
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will only shift up or down when the driver moves the gear selector rearward (+) or forward (-), except as described below.

The transmission will automatically upshift lower and higher when necessary to prevent engine overspeed.
The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will display the current gear.
The transmission will automatically downshift to FIRST or SECOND gear (depending on model) when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated.
You can start out (from a stop) in FIRST or SECOND gear. Starting out in SECOND gear can be helpful in snow or icy conditions. Tap the gear selector forward or rearward to select the desired gear after the vehicle is brought to a stop.
If a requested downshift would cause the engine to overspeed, that shift will not occur.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed.
Avoid using Cruise Control when AutoStick is engaged because the transmission will not shift automatically.
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is enabled.
The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault or overheat condition is detected.

To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick position at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.

WARNING
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or personal injury.

TRANSMISSION LIMP HOME MODE

Transmission function is electronically monitored for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may operate only in a fixed gear, or may remain in NEUTRAL. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission. In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps:

Stop the vehicle.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the ignition OFF.
Wait approximately 10 seconds.
Restart the engine.
Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation.

NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the condition of your transmission. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is required.

IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK

This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock, which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition can be turned to the OFF position. Also, the transmission is locked in PARK whenever the ignition is in the OFF position.

BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK (BTSI) SYSTEM

This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI that holds the transmission gear selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be in the RUN position
(engine running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must also be pressed before pushing the button on the gear selector to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.

FAQs

What kind of transmission is offered with the 2022 Fiat 500X?

A 9-speed automatic transmission is standard on the 2022 Fiat 500X.

Will the 2022 Fiat 500X be available with a manual transmission?

No, the 2022 Fiat 500X does not have a manual transmission. Only an automatic transmission is included with it.

The automatic transmission in the 2022 Fiat 500X has how many gears?

The Fiat 500X’s automatic transmission features nine speeds.

Does the 2022 Fiat 500X have all-wheel drive (AWD) options?

Yes, all-wheel drive (AWD) is an option for the 2022 Fiat 500X for better handling and traction.

Is the automatic transmission in the 2022 Fiat 500X capable of manual gearshifting?

Yes, the 2022 Fiat 500X has a manual shift mode that enables you to manually choose gears if you so choose.

Does the 2022 Fiat 500X’s transmission feature a sport mode?

Yes, the 2022 Fiat 500X frequently comes with a sport setting that can improve the responsiveness of the transmission for a more exciting driving experience.

How fuel-efficient is the automatic transmission on the 2022 Fiat 500X?

The automatic transmission in the 2022 Fiat 500X is built to balance performance and fuel economy, however the precise fuel efficiency can change depending on the engine and driving conditions.

Is the automatic transmission in the 2022 Fiat 500X capable of towing a trailer?

The answer is usually yes, but depending on the model and engine, the towing capacity of the 2022 Fiat 500X may change.

Does the 2022 Fiat 500X’s transmission come with a warranty?

Fiat normally provides a standard warranty that covers the transmission for a predetermined amount of time or miles, but the specifics may vary by location, so it’s advisable to with your local Fiat dealer.

Does the transmission of the 2022 Fiat 500X require routine maintenance?

Yes, routine maintenance, such as fluid changes, may be necessary to guarantee optimal performance and lifetime, as with all transmissions. The owner’s manual should be consulted for maintenance schedules.

Have there been any reports of widespread transmission problems with the 2022 Fiat 500X?

To get a feel of probable transmission problems specific to the 2022 model year, it’s crucial to search for the most recent owner reviews and reports, as well as any manufacturer recalls or service bulletins.

Will the Fiat 500X be available in 2022 with an electric or hybrid transmission?

Fiat had not yet revealed a hybrid or electric 500X for 2022 as of my most recent update in September 2021. But it’s a smart move.

Does the 2022 Fiat 500X’s transmission have advanced driver aid functions, such as adaptive cruise control?

Some Fiat 500X cars from 2022 might be fitted with cutting-edge driving aids including adaptive cruise control, which can interact with the transmission to keep a safe following distance.

In order to warm up the transmission in cold weather, may I acquire a remote start option for the 2022 Fiat 500X?

The 2022 Fiat 500X might come with a remote start technology, which might help warm up the engine and transmission in cold weather, depending on the trim level and options package.

What role does the transmission play in the overall driving experience of the 2022 Fiat 500X?

The 2022 Fiat 500X’s 9-speed automatic transmission is built to offer seamless shifts, good fuel economy, and responsive performance, all of which contribute to a pleasurable driving experience under diverse circumstances.

Useful Links

View full pdf: 2022 Fiat 500X User Manual
2022 Fiat 500X All Wheel Drive Guide

Tags Fiat, Fiat 2022, Fiat 500X, Transmission

Fiat

2022 Fiat 500X All Wheel Drive Guide

The compact SUV with all-wheel drive (AWD) from Fiat in 2022 combines Italian style with adaptable performance. The 500X AWD delivers a blend of design, capability, and technology that distinguishes it in its class and was created to fulfill the needs of contemporary drivers. This vehicle is designed to give you improved traction, stability, and all-weather confidence whether you’re navigating city streets or going on off-the-beaten-path experiences. We will delve into the main benefits and features that distinguish the 2022 Fiat 500X AWD as a standout option for those looking for a functional and fashionable small SUV in this introduction.

Fiat offers a variety of trim levels and optional options that let you customize your 500X to fit your tastes. Whether you value luxurious features or athletic performance, there is probably a configuration that meets your requirements. The 500X’s small size makes it easy to maneuver through city streets and into confined parking places. It is a fantastic option for urban people looking for an AWD car due to its maneuverability and agility. In conclusion, the 2022 Fiat 500X All Wheel Drive is a formidable contender in the compact SUV market thanks to its attractive combination of style, capability, and technology. The 500X AWD is a vehicle that appeals to those who appreciate its distinctive Italian design or who require a trustworthy partner for a variety of driving situations.

ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED

This feature provides on-demand All-Wheel Drive (AWD). The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required. Under normal driving conditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction. If the front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle input (where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be sent to the rear in a preemptive effort to improve vehicle launch and performance characteristics.

CAUTION
All wheels must have the same size and type tires. Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire size may cause failure of the power transfer unit.

DYNAMIC SELECTOR — IF EQUIPPED

The Dynamic Selector combines the capabilities of the vehicle control systems, along with driver input, to provide the best performance in all driving conditions.

Dynamic Selector Switch

The Dynamic Selector consists of the following positions:

Auto Mode – This mode is designed for comfort and safety in normal driving conditions. In versions equipped with All-Wheel Drive, this mode also reduces fuel consumption by automatically altering the distribution of torque between the front and rear axle.

All Weather Mode – This mode offers increased traction control and stability control for low traction conditions such as driving on a dirt road or off-road as well as wet and slippery roads.

Sport Mode – This mode is designed to increase steering feedback to the driver with a slight increase in effort and changes the transmission shift schedules for more aggressive shifting. This driving mode is useful while driving on twisty roads where more steering precision is desired in spirited cornering.

WARNING MESSAGES

In the event of a system fault, the system automatically defaults to “Auto” mode and a message will appear in the instrument cluster display.

ELECTRIC POWER STEERING

The electric power steering system will provide increased vehicle response and ease of maneuverability. The power steering system adapts to different driving conditions.

WARNING
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible.

If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” OR “POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF – SERVICE SYSTEM” message and a steering wheel icon are displayed on the instrument cluster screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance.

NOTE:

Even if the power steering assistance is no longer operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort, espe-cially at low speeds and during parking maneuvers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer for service.

FAQs

What does the Fiat 500X’s AWD system do?

The “Dynamic All Wheel Drive” AWD technology is an option on the 2022 Fiat 500X. On a variety of roads, this technology improves stability and traction.

Are all 2022 Fiat 500X vehicles have to have AWD?

No, not all models come equipped with AWD. On some trim levels, it’s an optional feature.

How does the AWD system in the Fiat 500X of 2022 operate?

In order to improve traction and handling, the 2022 Fiat 500X’s AWD system is intended to automatically divide power between the front and rear wheels as necessary.

In the 2022 Fiat 500X, is it possible to manually enable or disable AWD?

The AWD system in the 2022 Fiat 500X doesn’t have a manual engagement/disengagement capability; it runs automatically.

What benefit does AWD offer the Fiat 500X in 2022?

AWD improves stability and traction, especially in inclement weather like rain or snow. Overall driving confidence is increased.

Does the Fiat 500X’s AWD effect fuel efficiency?

Because of the extra weight and drivetrain parts, AWD can have a little lower fuel economy than front-wheel drive vehicles.

The AWD Fiat 500X from 2022 can I tow?

The AWD Fiat 500X is capable of towing, albeit it might not be as much as front-wheel drive counterparts can.

Is the 2022 Fiat 500X’s AWD system more expensive to maintain?

AWD systems typically need a little more upkeep than two-wheel drive systems. The added expense is typically not very high.

Is the Fiat 500X’s AWD system appropriate for off-road driving?

The AWD system can manage light off-road conditions but is primarily built for traction and stability on roads.

Does the AWD system in the 2022 Fiat 500X offer many driving modes?

The 2022 Fiat 500X offers configurable drive modes, including particular settings for AWD performance, in some trim levels.

Is the Fiat 500X’s AWD system dependable in snowy weather in 2022?

Yes, the AWD system is advantageous for winter driving because it is built to increase traction in snowy circumstances.

What safety features are connected to the 500X’s AWD system in 2022?

The AWD system can increase safety in slick or difficult driving conditions and help to overall vehicle stability.

Does the interior room of the 2022 Fiat 500X suffer from the AWD system?

Although the AWD system’s components may need a little extra room, overall interior space isn’t usually greatly impacted.

Are there any extra fees if AWD is selected in the 2022 Fiat 500X?

Yes, AWD is frequently an extra-cost option compared to the standard front-wheel drive vehicle.

What is the scope of the Fiat 500X’s AWD system warranty?

AWD systems frequently have their own warranty terms, which are frequently comparable to the regular warranty coverage of the vehicle. Warranty coverage may vary. Make sure to ask your local Fiat dealer about the specifics of the warranty’s coverage.

Useful Links

View full pdf: 2022 Fiat 500X User Manual
2022 Fiat 500X Seat Belts Instruction Guide

Tags All Wheel Drive, Fiat, Fiat 2022, Fiat 500X

Fiat

2022 Fiat 500X Seat Belts Instruction Guide

Safety comes first in the world of contemporary cars, and the 2022 Fiat 500X is no exception. You’ll quickly learn that safety comes first as you set out on your adventure in this chic and small crossover SUV, and one important part of this safety package is its cutting-edge seat belts. The 2022 Fiat 500X has reinvented the function of seat belts in assuring the safety and wellbeing of the driver and passengers, despite the fact that they may appear to be an ordinary and unremarkable element. These seat belts combine creativity, technology, and Italian aesthetic flare in addition to being utilitarian. In this introduction, we will examine the outstanding seat belt system that distinguishes the 2022 Fiat 500X and show how it not only safeguards but also improves your driving experience overall.

Utilizing state-of-the-art technology and materials, the seat belts for the 2022 Fiat 500X have been painstakingly engineered to offer enhanced protection in the event of a collision and to assure the maximum safety for all occupants. But in addition to serving their intended purpose, they also provide a level of comfort and convenience that elevates the Fiat 500X’s driving experience. The seat belts of the 2022 Fiat 500X are a distinctive feature in this outstanding vehicle. Join us as we examine the cutting-edge safety features, ergonomic design, and aesthetic components that give them that distinction. The seat belts in the 2022 Fiat are more than simply cloth straps; you’ll learn about their intuitive functionality and how they contribute to the car’s overall safety ecology.

SEAT BELT SYSTEMS

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street. Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.

Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)

Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.

Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.

BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts.

Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed. BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.

NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.

Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts. The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.

WARNING

Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-ously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or not an air bag is also provided at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size.
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you prop-erly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal inju-ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-ately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have questions regarding seat belt or retractor conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho-rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility for inspection.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat.
The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grab the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap.
When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/shoulder belt.

Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point.
At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.
Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that serves you best.

Adjustable Anchorage Up

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position.

NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.

WARNING

Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjustments when the vehicle is stationary.

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.

Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.

NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.

Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an Energy Management feature that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.

Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each seating position.

Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations

ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.

WARNING

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.

How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode

Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted.
Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.

How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

WARNING

The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child.

FAQs

In the 2022 Fiat 500X, are seatbelts required?

Yes, all passengers in the 2022 Fiat 500X are required by law to wear seat belts.

How many seatbelts is the Fiat 500X equipped with in 2022?

Five seat belts are normally present on a 2022 Fiat 500X to accommodate the driver and passengers.

Can the Fiat 500X seat belts be adjusted in height?

Yes, a lot of contemporary cars, like the 2022 Fiat 500X, have height-adjustable seat belts for better comfort and security.

Do the 2022 Fiat 500X’s back seats have three-point seat belts?

Yes, the 2022 Fiat 500X usually comes with three-point seat belts in the back seats.

How should my seat belt be fastened in the 2022 Fiat 500X?

When you hear a click, insert the metal tongue of your seat belt into the matching buckle. A snug fit is ideal, but not too tight.

Can I turn off the Fiat 500X’s seatbelt-reminder chime?

No, for safety concerns, the majority of automobiles are built with seat belt reminder chimes that are difficult to turn off.

Do child safety seats have seat belt height adjustments?

It’s true that the 2022 Fiat 500X frequently has seat belt height adjustments for child safety seats.

Does the 2022 Fiat 500X have seatbelt pretensioners?

To tighten the seat belt in the event of a collision, modern cars like the 2022 Fiat 500X frequently have seat belt pretensioners.

Are aftermarket seatbelts compatible with the 2022 Fiat 500X?

Installing aftermarket seat belts is not advised since they might not adhere to safety regulations. Always utilize parts that the manufacturer has approved.

Are there LATCH anchors for kid safety seats in the back seats?

Yes, child safety seat anchors for LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) are frequently included in the 2022 Fiat 500X.

How frequently should I check the condition of my seat belts?

Regularly check your seat belts for signs of wear or damage, and if you find any, have them checked by a professional.

Will the Fiat 500X have seat belt extenders in 2022?

Seat belt extenders may be available for particular needs; inquire with your local Fiat dealership about compatibility and availability.

Can faulty seat belts in the Fiat 500X from 2022 be replaced?

To guarantee safety, authorized repair centers can replace broken seat belts.

Do all occupants of the 2022 Fiat 500X have to wear seat belts?

All passengers in a vehicle are required to wear seat belts, regardless of where they are seated.

Does the 2022 Fiat 500X have any cutting-edge safety features like seat belts?

To improve passenger safety, the 2022 Fiat 500X might include cutting-edge safety features including seat belt reminders and sensors.

Useful Links

View full pdf: 2022 Fiat 500X User Manual
2022 Fiat 500X Maintenance Schedule

Tags Fiat, Fiat 2022, Fiat 500X, Seat Belts

Fiat

2022 Fiat 500X Maintenance Schedule

A beautiful and small crossover SUV with an Italian flare and utility, the 2022 Fiat 500X. Regular maintenance is necessary to guarantee that your Fiat 500X continues to provide a comfortable and enjoyable driving experience. With the help of this manual, you can maintain your 2022 Fiat 500X in the best possible shape for many more years to come. Regular maintenance promotes safety, dependability, and fuel economy while also extending the life of your car. No matter if you’re an experienced auto enthusiast or a first-time Fiat owner, this maintenance guide will provide you helpful advice on how to keep your 2022 Fiat 500X in top driving condition.

We’ll go over important maintenance procedures including oil changes, tire care, brake maintenance, fluid checks, and more in this tutorial. We’ll also go over how crucial it is to adhere to the manufacturer’s suggested maintenance schedule, which is created to meet particular requirements and potential problems particular to the 2022 Fiat 500X. You can make the most of your 2022 Fiat 500X while assuring your safety and peace of mind on every trip by following a regular maintenance schedule and remaining updated about your vehicle’s particular requirements. Let’s explore the world of Fiat 500X maintenance now and keep your vehicle in excellent shape.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate in the instrument cluster. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer towing and extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message is displayed. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km). An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change.

NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers.

Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:

Check engine oil level.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual wear or damage.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, and brake master cylinder reservoir, and fill as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior lights.

MAINTENANCE PLAN

At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:

Change oil and filter.

Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.

Inspect the CV/Universal joints.

Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and hoses.

Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.

Check and adjust hand brake.

Inspect exhaust system.

Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions.

NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge roller pivot joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)

10,000

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years:

Or Kilometers:

16,000

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, if necessary, check Tire Service Kit expiration date

(if provided).

•

Check operation of lighting system (headlamps, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, luggage compartment, passenger compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.).

•

Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels (brakes/hydraulic clutch, windshield washer, engine coolant, etc.).

•

Check engine control system operation (via diagnostic tool).

•

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)

10,000

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years:

Or Kilometers:

16,000

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Visually inspect condition of: exterior bodywork, underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust – fuel system – brakes), rubber elements (boots, sleeves, bushings, etc.).

•

Check windshield/rear window wiper blade position/wear.

•

Check operation of windshield washer system and adjust jets if necessary.

•

Check cleanliness of hood and liftgate locks and cleanliness and lubrication of linkages.

•

Visually check the condition and wear of the front and rear brakes.

•

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)

10,000

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years:

Or Kilometers:

16,000

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Check the front suspension, tie rods and replace if necessary.

•

Inspect the CV/Universal joints.

•

Visual inspect the condition of the accessory drive belt.

•

Check the tension of the accessory drive belt.

•

Inspect and replace, if required, front end accessory drive belt, tensioner, and, idler pulley.

•

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)

10,000

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years:

Or Kilometers:

16,000

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.

•

Change engine oil and replace oil filter.1

In accordance with Oil Change Indicator System OR Severe Duty Mileage, whichever occurs first.

Inspect the PTU fluid level.

•

Inspect the rear differential fluid level.

•

Replace spark plugs. 2

•

Replace engine air cleaner filter. 3

•

Replace brake fluid every two years.

•

Replace cabin air filter.

To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)

10,000

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years:

Or Kilometers:

16,000

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.

•

The oil and oil filter replacement must be carried out when indicated by a warning light or message on the instrument panel, or in any case should not exceed 1 year or 10,000 miles (16,000 km).
The spark plug change is distance based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
The following are essential to ensure correct operation and prevent serious damage to the engine:
1. Only use spark plugs of the same make and type which are specially certified for such engines.
2. Strictly comply with the spark plug replacement interval given in the Maintenance Plan for spark plug replacement.
3. Contact an authorized dealer if you have any questions.
The engine air cleaner filter should be inspected at every oil change if used in dusty areas.
1. Recommend replacement
2. Mandatory service

WARNING

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

1.3L TURBO ENGINE

Oil Fill Cap/Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Air Cleaner Filter (Located Under Engine Cover)
Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
Battery
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap

CHECKING OIL LEVEL

To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off. Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.

NOTE:
The dipstick is integral with the cap.

Engine Oil Cap/Dipstick Installation
Install the oil cap/dipstick aligning arrow on the cap with arrow on the engine cover and then screw the cap down. 2022 Fiat 500X Maintenance 02

Oil Cap/Dipstick Arrow
Engine Cover Arrow

There are four possible dipstick types:

Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN and the MAX ends of the range.

NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is at the low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the high end of the range marking.

CAUTION
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.

ADDING WASHER FLUID

The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment, and the fluid level should be checked at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not engine coolant/ antifreeze).

WARNING
Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution.

MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY

Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, and periodic maintenance is not required.

WARNING

Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.

CAUTION

It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.

PRESSURE WASHING

Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure washer is not recommended.

CAUTION
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts and connections however, the pressures generated by these machines is such that complete protection against water ingress cannot be guaranteed.

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.

NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

WARNING
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

FAQs

How frequently should I have my 2022 Fiat 500X’s oil changed?

Your Fiat 500X should typically have its oil changed every 5,000 to 7,500 miles, or as specified in your owner’s handbook.

Which kind of oil is best for my Fiat 500X?

Synthetic 5W-30 oil is normally advised for use in the 2022 Fiat 500X, but it’s important to check your owner’s manual for more detailed instructions.

How frequently should my tires be rotated?

Every 6,000 to 8,000 miles, tire rotation is normally advised to provide even wear and prolong tire life.

When should the air filter in my Fiat 500X be changed?

Depending on driving circumstances and the air filter type, the air filter needs to be changed every 15,000 to 30,000 miles.

How often should I inspect the braking discs and pads?

When performing routine maintenance, which should be done every 10,000 to 15,000 miles, check your brake pads and discs. If they are broken or worn out, get new ones.

What is the recommended time between transmission fluid changes?

The frequency of transmission fluid changes varies, but generally speaking, every 30,000 to 60,000 miles. Consult your owner’s manual for detailed instructions.

How frequently should the cabin air filter be changed?

Depending on driving circumstances, cabin air filters should be changed every 15,000 to 30,000 miles.

Is using premium fuel a requirement when operating a Fiat 500X?

Typically, ordinary unleaded gasoline with an octane value of 87 works just well in the 2022 Fiat 500X. Unless your owner’s handbook specifies differently, premium fuel is not necessary.

When should I get a new timing belt?

Although the suggested mileage range for timing belt replacement varies, it is frequently between 60,000 and 100,000 miles. For exact instructions, go to your owner’s manual.

How frequently should the battery be checked?

When performing routine maintenance, check your battery; if it exhibits indicators of corrosion, aging, or decreased performance, replace it.

What tire pressure should I use for my Fiat 500X?

As advised in your owner’s manual and typically between 32 and 35 PSI, check and maintain your tires at this PSI.

When should the spark plugs be changed?

Depending on the kind of spark plug and engine, spark plugs should normally be changed every 30,000 to 100,000 miles. For instructions, consult your owner’s handbook.

Do I need to frequently have the cooling system flushed?

Depending on the coolant type being used, flushing the cooling system every 2 to 5 years is advised. Refer to your owner’s manual for instructions.

How frequently should I examine my brake fluid?

During routine maintenance, check your brake fluid and top it off if necessary. Consider performing a thorough brake fluid flush every two years or as directed.

Is it crucial to adhere to the manufacturer’s recommended maintenance schedule?

It’s important to adhere to the manufacturer’s suggested maintenance regimen if you want to keep your 2022 Fiat 500X reliable and long-lasting. It attends to particular requirements and aids in averting future problems.

Useful Links

View full pdf: 2022 Fiat 500X User Manual
2022 Fiat 500X Fuses and Fuse Box Guidelines

Tags Fiat, Fiat 2022, Fiat 500X, Maintenance

Fiat

2022 Fiat 500X Fuses and Fuse Box Guidelines

Welcome to the realm of automotive safety and electrical protection, where even the tiniest parts are vital to maintaining the smooth operation of your car. We shall examine the fuses and fuse box of the 2022 Fiat 500X in this introduction, illuminating their significance and outlining how they support the dependable running of this contemporary compact crossover. Fuses may appear to be modest parts, yet they protect the electrical system of your car invisibly. A carefully thought-out fuse and fuse box system in the 2022 Fiat 500X guarantees that electrical circuits are safeguarded from overloads, short circuits, and other potential dangers. Maintaining the performance and safety of your Fiat 500X depends on your understanding of their function. The fuse box, which houses a network of fuses that are carefully positioned to protect various electrical operations throughout the vehicle, serves as the brain of this safety system.

These fuses are made to interrupt the circuit when an excessive amount of current flows, protecting vital parts and reducing the possibility of electrical fires. Each component, including the lights, power windows, infotainment system, and engine control unit, depends on a certain fuse to keep working properly. The fuse and fuse box system for the 2022 Fiat 500X goes above and beyond basic protection in this era of cutting-edge automotive technology. It includes smart fuses and diagnostics, making troubleshooting simpler and reducing downtime. Your driving experience will be uninterrupted and hassle-free as a result. The many fuse types used in the 2022 Fiat 500X, their placements within the fuse box, and how to recognize and replace them when required will all be covered in the discussions that follow. You’ll be better prepared to preserve the dependability and safety of your Fiat 500X for many years to come if you comprehend the function of these modest but essential parts. So let’s have a look at the electrical safety system of the Fiat 500X and see how it enhances your driving experience and sense of security.

FUSES

General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive current. When a device does not work, you must check the electrical circuit inside the fuse for a break/melt.
Also please be aware that using power outlets for extended periods of time with the engine off may result in vehicle battery discharge.

WARNING

When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, gearbox system), steering system or Body Control Module (BCM) blows, contact an authorized dealer.

Blade Fuses

Electrical Circuit
Blade Fuse With Good Electrical Circuit
Blade Fuse With Bad Electrical Circuit

Fuse Removal
To replace a fuse use the extractor attached to the fuse cover (located on the inside of the engine compartment fuse cover.)

Fuse Extractor Location

Access To The Fuses
The fuses are grouped into four controllers located in the engine compartment, under the instrument panel and on the inside of the left side cargo trim panel.

Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution Unit
The engine compartment fuse panel is part of the Body Control Module (BCM), located on the left side of the engine compartment.

NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for BCM fuse replacement.

Engine Compartment Fuse Location

Fuse Panel And Cover Removal

Mounting Screw
Fuse Cover

Removing Fuse Cover and Locking Screw

Proceed as follows:

Slowly turn the screw counterclockwise.
Slowly release the screw.
Remove the fuse cover by sliding it upward.

Mounting Fuse Cover and Locking Screw

Proceed as follows:

Properly secure the fuse cover to the box, slide completely from top to bottom.
Fully press the screw, using the special screwdriver supplied.
Slowly turn the screw clockwise.
Release the screw.

Battery Fuse Cover Location

Fuse Cover Tabs
Fuse Cover

Cavity	Maxi Fuse	Cartridge Fuse	Mini Fuse	Description
If Equipped *
F01	70 Amp Tan	–	–	Module Body Computer
F02	60 Amp Blue	–	–	Module Body Computer, Rear Distribution Units
F03	–	20 Amp Blue	–	Controller Power Supply Body Computer

Cavity	Maxi Fuse	Cartridge Fuse	Mini Fuse	Description
If Equipped *
F04	–	30 Amp Pink	–	Brake Control Electronics Module
F05	70 Amp Tan	–	–	Electric Power-Assisted Steering
F06	70 Amp Tan	–	–	Engine Cooling fan
F08	–	30 Amp Pink	–	Automatic Transmission, GSM
F09	–	–	5 Amp Tan	Control Module Engine
F10	–	–	10 Amp Red	Horn
F11	–	–	5 Amp Tan	Supply Secondary Loads
F14	–	–	7.5 Amp Brown	WCAC Supply Pump
F15	40 Amp Orange	–	–	Brake Control Module Pump
F16	–	–	5 Amp Tan	Engine Control Module Power, Automatic Transmission
F17	–	–	30 Amp Green	Power Control Module Engine
F18	–	–	30 Amp Green	Power All-Wheel Drive
F19	–	–	7.5 Amp Brown	Air Conditioner Compressor

Cavity	Maxi Fuse	Cartridge Fuse	Mini Fuse	Description
If Equipped *
F20	–	–	5 Amp Tan	Electronic Power Four-Wheel Drive
F21	–	–	15 Amp Blue	Fuel Pump
F22	–	–	10 Amp Red	Supply Primary Loads
F23	–	–	20 Amp Yellow (Customer Installed)	Power Outlet (Battery Powered)
F24	–	–	15 Amp Blue	Electronic Unit Supply Automatic Transmission
F30	–	–	30 Amp Green	Heated Windshield *
F82	–	20 Amp Blue	–	Control Module Engine
F83	–	40 Amp Green	–	Air Conditioning Fan
F84	–	–	20 Amp Yellow	Power Outlet (Ignition Powered)
F87	–	–	5 Amp Tan	Gear Selector Automatic Transmission
F88	–	–	7.5 Amp Brown	Heated Outside Mirrors
F89	–	30 Amp Pink	–	Heated Rear Window
F90	–	–	5 Amp Tan	IBS Sensor (Battery State of Charge)

Body Computer Fuse Center
The controller is located at the left side of the steering column at the bottom of the instrument panel. For the fuse replacement see an authorized dealer.

Body Controller Fuse Cavities

Cavity	Mini Fuse	Description
F31	7.5 Amp Brown	Fan Air Conditioning, Power Socket
F33	20 Amp Yellow	Power Window Front (Passenger Side)
F34	20 Amp Yellow	Power Window Front (Driver’s Side)
F36	15 Amp Blue	Supply Uconnect System, Air Conditioning, USB Port, Rear lateral ceiling light in case of open roof, EOBD port
F37	10 Amp Red	System Power Forward Collision Warning Plus, All-Wheel Drive (AWD), IPC, Central stack switches, Brake Pedal Switch (NC)
F38	20 Amp Yellow	Central Locking
F42	7.5 Amp Brown	BSM – Brake Control Module, EPS – Electric Power-Assisted Steering
F43	20 Amp Yellow	Bi-directional Pump Washer
F47	20 Amp Yellow	Power Rear Window (Driver Side)
F48	20 Amp Yellow	Power Rear Window (Passenger Side)
F49	7.5 Amp Brown	Supply ParkSense, Spot Lights Front Dome, Internal Electrochromic Mirror, Heated Front Seats, SGW, Sunroof Motor.
F50	7.5 Amp Brown	Supply Air Bag
F51	7.5 Amp Brown	Air Conditioning Compressor, Plaque Automatic Transmission, Rear Camera, Air Conditioning, LDW – Lane Departure Warning, ASS – Auxiliary Stack Switch, DSU – Drive Selector Unit, Reverse gear switch, side mirrors and rear window defrost
F53	7.5 Amp Brown	Supply IPC/Starter Device/System Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ , Brake Pedal Switch (NA), EPB – Electric Parking Brake

Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit
To access the fuses, remove the access door from the left rear panel of the rear cargo area. Push on the left side of the access door to unhinge and remove.

Rear Cargo Fuse Cavities

Cavity	Mini Fuse	Description
F2	20 Amp Yellow	Audio System
F3	20 Amp Yellow	Electric Sunroof
F5	30 Amp Green	Power Seat (driver side)
F6	7.5 Amp Brown	Power Seat (driver side) Lumbar Adjustment
F8	20 Amp Yellow	Heating Front Seats

BULB REPLACEMENT

General Information

Before you replace a bulb, check the contacts to be sure they are not oxidized.
Replace the bulbs with the same type and wattage.
After replacing a light bulb, always check the correct orientation.
Before replacing a bulb that is not functioning, check that the fuse is intact.

NOTE:
Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process.

Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section includes bulb description and replacement part numbers. All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-wedge base. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.

NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.

Interior Lamps
Lamp Name	Lamp Number
Front Courtesy Light	C5W
Front Courtesy Lights (Sun Visors)	C5W
Rear Dome Light (Models Without Retractable Roof)	C5W
Rear Interior Lights (Models With Retractable Roof)	C5W
Interior Lights	W5W
Dome Light (Glove Compartment)	W5W

Exterior Lamps
Lamp Name	Lamp Number
Low Beam/High Beam Headlamps	HIR2
Optional Low Beam/High Bean Headlamps	LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Position/Daytime Running Lights (DRL)	LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Direction Indicator Lamps	WY21W
Fog Lamps (Halogen)	H11
Fog Lamps (LED)	LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Side Indicators (Side View Mirror)	WY5W
Side Marker	LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Tail/Brake lights	LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Turn Indicators	WY21W
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)	LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Reverse	P21W
License Plate Lamp	W5W

Replacing Exterior Bulbs

Headlamps

Front Lamps

Headlamps
Daytime Running Lamps
Directional Indicators
Fog Lamps — If Equipped

Hi/Lo Beam Light Halogen
See the following steps for bulb replacement:

Open the engine compartment and remove the headlamp bulb cap.
Rotate the headlamp bulb socket counter-clockwise then pull outwards.
Release the locking tab on the headlamp bulb connector and remove the bulb and socket.
Install the new headlamp bulb making sure it is properly locked.
Install the headlamp bulb and socket; align the tabs and turn it clockwise making sure it is properly locked.

Headlamp Bulb Connector

WARNING
Carry out the operation of replacing lamps only with the engine off. Also make sure that the engine is cold, to avoid the danger of burns.

LED Main Beam/Dipped Beam Headlights/Fog Lights — If Equipped
For replacing these bulbs, contact an authorized dealership.

Side Lights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
The side lights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) are LED-type. To replace them, contact an authorized dealership.

Side Marker
Side marker lights are LED-type. For replacing these bulbs, contact an authorized dealer

Front Direction Indicator Lamp
See the following steps for bulb replacement:

Turn the front wheels completely.
Use a suitable tool to remove the access door.
1. Screws
2. Access Door
Turn the bulb and bulb holder assembly counterclockwise and then remove it sliding it outwards.
Replace the bayonet-fitted bulb.
Finally, refit the inspection door, fully tightening fixing screws.

Fog Lights (Halogen)
See the following steps for bulb replacement:

Turn the front wheels completely.
Use a suitable tool to remove the access door.
1. Screws
2. Access Door
Turn the bulb and bulb holder assembly counterclockwise and then remove it sliding it outwards.
Replace the bayonet-fitted bulb.
Finally, refit the inspection door, fully tightening fixing screws.

Side Indicators on External Rear View Mirrors – If Equipped

CAUTION
The procedure is described as a guideline. For the replacement of the lamp it is recommended that you contact an authorized dealer.

See the following steps for bulb replacement:

Remove the mirror cap on the outside rear view mirror.
Mirror Cap
1. Mirror Cover
2. Side Indicator Lens
3. Side Indicator Bulb Location
Remove the transparent lens assembly as shown.
Remove the bulb socket and bulb from the transparent lens assembly by rotating the socket counterclockwise.
Remove the bulb from the bulb socket by pulling the bulb straight out.
Insert the new bulb, making sure that it is locked into place.
Reinstall the socket in to the transparent lens assembly.
Reinstall the cover on the outside rear view mirror, making sure it is locked into place.

Rear Tail Lamps

Tail Light

Tail lights/Brake Lights
Direction indicator
REVERSE lights

Tail Lamps
The tail lights are LED-type. For replacing these bulbs, contact an authorized dealership.

Brake Lights
The brake lights are LED-type. For replacing these bulbs, contact an authorized dealership.

Side Marker
Side marker lights are LED-type. For replacing these bulbs, contact an authorized dealer

3th Stop Lamp
The CHMSL is LED. For their replacement see an authorized dealer.

Reversing Light & Rear Direction Indicators
See the following steps for bulb replacement:

Open liftgate
Using a suitable tool, undo the two inboard screws, then release the light cluster from the respective pin fasteners pulling it carefully.
Tail Light Screws
Disconnect the connector, then undo the two screws to access the bulbs.
Locate faulty bulb and press slightly and turn at the same time: counterclockwise to extract; clockwise to install.
Reposition the bulb holder assembly in the headlight body, proceed until you hear the tabs click.
Reinstall tail lamp assembly and close liftgate.

License Plate Lights
See the following steps for bulb replacement: To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:

Using a suitable tool remove the license plate lens.
Remove the bulbs from the individual side contacts.
Insert the new bulbs, and ensure that they are properly locked between the contacts.
Reinstall the license plate lens.

NOTE:
If removal the license plate lens using a suitable tool, be sure to cover the tip of the suitable with a cloth so no damage is done to the lenses or the vehicle paint.

Replacing Interior Bulbs

Front Courtesy Light
See the following steps for bulb replacement:

Using a suitable tool remove the front courtesy light as shown.
Release the retainer clips and bulb housing as shown.Front Courtesy Bulb Housing
1. Retaining Clips
2. Bulb Housing
Replace the bulbs by pulling straight out of bulb housing.
Insert the new bulbs, making sure that they are properly locked.
Reassemble the bulb housing and courtesy light housing making sure that they are properly locked.
Install the front courtesy light making sure that it is properly locked.

FAQs

What does an automobile fuse do?

An electrical circuit uses fuses as a safety measure to stop excessive electricity from flowing and harming the circuit or its electrical components.

What does a fuse box do?

A fuse box is a container that holds several fuses, frequently arranged by circuits or systems, and it’s normally found within the car, either in the engine compartment.

Why are fuses used in automobiles?

If there is an electrical overload, short circuit, or other defect, fuses protect the electrical system by cutting the circuit. This avoids component damage and lowers the possibility of electrical fires.

How can I tell if a fuse is blown?

An obvious break in the fuse’s wiring indicates that it has blown. Additionally, some fuse boxes feature a schematic that shows which fuse goes with which electrical component.

What must I do if a fuse in my automobile blows?

Replace blown fuses with new ones with the same amperage rating. To avoid harming the circuit or its components, always utilize the right amperage rating.

In my Fiat 500X, where is the fuse box?

Depending on the type and model of the car, the fuse box’s position may change. To find out where something is in your Fiat 500X specifically, see your owner’s manual or look for information online.

What are the typical causes of blown fuses in automobiles?

Various problems, such as electrical errors, short circuits, overloading of circuits, and defective parts, can lead to blown fuses.

Can I replace a blown fuse with a higher-amp fuse?

No, you shouldn’t ever substitute a higher-amp fuse. The usage of a higher-amp fuse can endanger safety and harm the electrical system.

May I change a blown fuse on my own?

Yes, the owner of the vehicle can usually repair blown fuses. For instructions on where to look for and how to change fuses, consult your owner’s manual.

Does the fuse box have extra fuses?

The fuse box in some cars may have extra fuses. To find out if and where spare fuses are available, consult your owner’s manual.

How can I keep my car’s fuses from blowing?

To avoid overloading circuits, check electrical components for damage, and take care of any electrical problems as soon as they arise.

What equipment do I need to change a fuse?

To remove and replace a fuse, you often simply need a set of needle-nose pliers or a fuse puller tool.

Can a circuit breaker take the place of a fuse?

Circuit breakers and fuses have different properties but similar functions. For proper protection, it is advised to swap out a fuse with another of its kind.

How can I turn a car’s circuit breaker back on?

The majority of auto circuit breakers reset themselves after the issue is fixed. If not, go to the owner’s manual for your car for further instructions.

What should I do if I’m unable to locate the problem that keeps blowing fuses?

It’s essential to get expert help from a licensed technician or automotive electrician to diagnose and resolve the underlying electrical issue if you frequently blow fuses.

Useful Links

View full pdf: 2022 Fiat 500X User Manual
2022 Fiat 500X Engine Oil and Fluids Operations

Tags Fiat, Fiat 500X, Fuse Box, Fuses

Fiat

2022 Fiat 500X Engine Oil and Fluids Operations

The flexible and fashionable crossover SUV Fiat 500X from 2022 fuses Italian style with cutting-edge technology and performance. Keeping an eye on the engine oil and fluids of this extraordinary vehicle is essential to preserving and maximizing performance. We shall examine the significance of engine oil and fluids in the context of the 2022 Fiat 500X in this introduction, emphasizing their contribution to the durability, effectiveness, and overall driving experience of the car. Your Fiat 500X’s engine oil keeps it running by lubricating its numerous parts, lowering friction, and dissipating heat. We’ll discuss the viscosity, quality requirements, and importance of routine oil changes as we examine the specifications of the engine oil suggested for the 2022 Fiat 500X.

We’ll also talk about how important it is to check and maintain the transmission fluid, coolant, brake fluid, and power steering fluid levels in your Fiat 500X. These fluids are essential to the transmission system, cooling system, braking capability, and general drivability of the car. We’ll also go through the potential repercussions of skipping routine fluid maintenance and how it can impact the performance, fuel efficiency, and general dependability of your Fiat 500X. This introduction will lay the groundwork for a thorough investigation of the engine oil and fluid specifications for the 2022 Fiat 500X, giving Fiat owners and enthusiasts invaluable tips on how to maintain their car’s performance and enjoyment for many years to come.

ENGINE OIL

Engine Oil Selection
For the proper engine oil selection.

American Petroleum Institute (API) Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified by the API. The manufacturer only recommends API trademark oils.

The API Starburst trademark certifies 0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40 and 5W-40 engine oil.

CAUTION
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.

Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.

ENGINE OIL FILTER

The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change.

ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER

For the proper maintenance intervals.

WARNING
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified filters should be used.

ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION

WARNING

Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time regardless of ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt. However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.

Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)

Conditions that would require replacement:

Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
Belt slips
Groove jumping (belt does not maintain correct position on pulley)
Belt broken (identify and correct problem before new belt is installed)
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)

Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected for damage and proper alignment. Belt replacement on some models requires the use of special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.

AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE

For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.

WARNING

Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information Book, located in your owner’s information kit, for further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician.

CAUTION
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. The manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by an authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.

Cabin Air Filter
See an authorized dealer for service.

BODY LUBRICATION

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as Mopar® Spray White Lube to ensure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film. Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chat-tering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.

The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected periodically, not just when wiper performance problems are experienced. This inspection should include the following points:

Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue

If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.

Service Position Strategy
The service position allows the wiper blades to be placed in a position that allows the wiper blades to be easily changed.
To enable the Service Position Strategy, the wipers must be in the Park position before placing the ignition in the OFF position. Service Mode must be activated within two minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position. To have a correct activation of strategy, the Service Position command (anti-panic) must be active for at least half a second. At every valid activation of Service Position command, the wiper blades are activated for 250 ms. The Service Position command can be repeated several times to bring the blades into the desired position, up to a maximum of three times. After three subsequent activations the strategy is disabled.

Function Deactivation:
The functionality is reset if:

The ignition is turned to the RUN position.
Number of subsequent activations is three.
Two minute timer has expired after placing the ignition OFF.

NOTE:
When turning the ignition ON, the blades will go into the parking position.

Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation

Lift the front wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade off of the windshield.
Push the release button on the arm of the wiper blade.
Push the wiper blade up and remove it.
1. Wiper Blade
2. Release Button
3. Wiper Arm
Install the wiper blade and firmly push the wiper blade until it snaps into place.

Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation

Carefully lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade off of the liftgate glass.
Grab and hold the wiper arm closest to the wiper blade end while pushing the wiper blade towards the liftgate glass to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper blade holder on the wiper arm.
Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly push the wiper blade until it snaps into place.

EXHAUST SYSTEM

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

WANING

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO Ú page 235.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.

CAUTION

The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle.

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.

NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.

To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:

Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition components disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.

COOLING SYSTEM

WARNING

You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The fan starts automatically and may start at any time, whether the engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the OFF position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition is in the ON position.

Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant is dirty, the system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser. Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.

Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill

If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032). For the proper maintenance intervals.

Selection Of Coolant

NOTE:

Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant, may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. OAT engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally compatible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an emer-gency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or anti-rust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact an authorized dealer.

Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle. Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant that meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant:

We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT that meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below − 34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact an authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.

NOTE

It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system, please contact a local authorized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.

Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle/recovery tank (if equipped).
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

WARNING

Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.

Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground, clean up any ground spills immediately. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately.

Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines marked on the bottle. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month. When additional coolant is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill. See an authorized dealer for service.

Cooling System Notes

NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment.

This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are required, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corro-sion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine cooling performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.

BRAKE SYSTEM

In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically.

WARNING
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency.

Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services, or immediately if the BRAKE Warning Light is on.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked when the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid

WARNING

Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid Ú page 320. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could result in a collision.

CAUTION
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch function and the ability to shift the transmission.

FAQs

What kind of engine oil should I use in my 2022 Fiat 500X?

Synthetic 5W-40 engine oil is normally required for your 2022 Fiat 500X, however it’s wise to check your owner’s handbook for the precise requirements.

How frequently should I have my engine oil changed?

Every 7,500 miles (or as recommended by the maintenance reminder system) Fiat advises replacing the engine oil and oil filter.

Can I use regular oil for synthetic oil?

Even though synthetic oil is ideal for performance, you can still use regular oil if necessary. Make sure it complies with the manufacturer’s requirements only.

Where is the oil dipstick for the engine?

Near the front of the engine is often where you’ll find the engine oil dipstick. Your owner’s manual will have the precise position listed in it.

How much engine oil can the 2022 Fiat 500X hold?

Depending on the engine type, the oil volume normally ranges from 4.5 to 5.1 quarts.

How do I determine the amount of engine oil?

Once the engine has cooled, park the car on a flat surface, remove the dipstick, clean it, and reinstall it before checking the oil level.

When the engine oil level is low, what should I do?

If the oil level is low, top it off with the right kind of oil before checking it again. Do not overfill.

Can I use any oil filter brand?

To ensure appropriate filtration, it is best to utilize a high-quality oil filter that complies with or surpasses Fiat’s requirements.

When should the oil filter be changed?

For optimum engine performance, change the oil filter after each oil change.

How frequently should I check the Fiat 500X’s other fluids?

As directed in your owner’s handbook or at regular maintenance intervals, check additional fluids like coolant, gearbox, and brake.

What kind of coolant is recommended for my Fiat 500X?

Utilize a superior ethylene glycol-based coolant that complies with Fiat’s requirements.

How can I determine the amount of transmission fluid?

Some contemporary vehicles might not have a dipstick for testing transmission fluid, so check your owner’s handbook. It can call for specialized equipment and methods.

Is it required to use lubricants with the Fiat name?

Although Fiat-branded fluids are advised, you can use premium, compatible fluids that comply with the manufacturer’s requirements.

How should I respond if I see a fluid leak under my car?

Determine the fluid being leaked, then contact a qualified mechanic for an inspection and any required repairs.

Can I check and maintain basic fluids on my own?

Yes, you can check the levels of simple fluids like engine oil and coolant, but you must also take safety precautions and adhere to your owner’s handbook. A professional technician should be consulted for more difficult tasks.

Useful Links

View full pdf: 2022 Fiat 500X User Manual
2022 Fiat 500X Fuses and Fuse Box Guidelines

Tags Engine Oil, Fiat, Fiat 500X, Fluids

Fiat

2023 Fiat 500X Cluster Warning Lights Guide

The 2023 Fiat 500X is a tribute to innovation and safety in the constantly changing world of automotive technology. This little SUV not only has performance and style, but it also has a sophisticated cluster warning light system that keeps you constantly informed about the condition and state of your car. This introduction will go through the 2023 Fiat 500X’s cluster warning lights, illuminating the numerous indicators that can help you drive with assurance and peace of mind. The 2023 Fiat 500X has a cutting-edge instrument panel that goes above and beyond the standard speedometer and fuel gauge.

It comes with a wide range of warning lights that are intended to keep you well-informed about important parts of your car’s operation. By interacting with you through these warning lights, your car can alert you to potential problems, upkeep needs, and security risks. To ensure a safe and comfortable driving experience, regardless of whether you’re an experienced driver or a new member of the Fiat family, it’s crucial to comprehend these cluster warning lights. The 2023 Fiat 500X does all possible to keep you up to date on your car’s health, from engine-related alarms to tire pressure monitoring. Join us as we explore the world of the 2023 Fiat 500X’s warning light cluster, revealing the mysteries of these crucial indicators and how they affect your driving experience as a whole. Get ready to take a tour of the cutting-edge automotive technology that distinguishes the 2023 Fiat 500X as a top pick for drivers who desire not just performance and style but also safety and peace of mind.

WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES

RED WARNING LIGHTS

Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault with the air bag, and will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level. The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

NOTE:
As the coolant temperature gauge approaches “H,” this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound.

Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when one or more door(s) are not fully closed.

NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving and a door is opened, there will also be a single chime.

Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there’s a fault with the EPS system.

WARNING
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible.

NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake pedals are pressed at the same time.

If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

Hood Open Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the hood is left open and not fully closed.

Vehicle Security Warning Light —If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security system is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.

Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the liftgate is open and not fully closed.

YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault in the ACC system. Contact a local authorized dealer for service.

Audio System Failure Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate to report a failure of the Audio System. Contact an authorized dealership as soon as possible.\

Drive Mode System Overheating Warning Light
This symbol appears, together with a dedicated message on the display, in case of overheating of the Drive Mode Selector system. In these conditions, the Drive Mode Selector system can still be used to select the required driving mode, but the mode will be engaged only when the system cools down.
The symbol will stay on for as long as the overheating condition persists.

Electric Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the Electric Park Brake is not functioning properly and service is required. Contact an authorized dealer.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the ESC system is Active. The ESC Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine running. If the ESC Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this warning light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off previously.

External Light Failure Warning Light — If Equipped
The External Light Failure Indicator will come on when a failure to one of the following lights is detected:

Direction Indicators
Backup Lights
Parking Lights
Daytime Running Lights
License Plate Lights

The failure relating to these lights could be:

One or more blown bulbs
A blown protection fuse
A break in the electrical connection

Fuel Cutoff Failure Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate if there is a fuel cutoff failure. If this light illuminates, take it to an authorized dealer and have them inspect it.

Fuel Level Sensor Failure Warning Light
This light illuminates when there is a fuel level sensor failure. If this light illuminates, take it to an authorized dealer and have them inspect it.

Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 1.3–1.8 gal (5–7 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added.

Service LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the Lane Sense system is not operating and requires service. Please see an authorized dealer.

Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. This warning light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing. When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible if this occurs.

Service Warning Light — If Equipped
The “Maintenance Plan” includes vehicle maintenance at fixed intervals. For further information Ú page 216. This message is displayed automatically along with the warning light when the key is turned to RUN – 1,242 miles (2,000 km) or 30 days before these deadlines, and reappears every time the key is turned to RUN. The indication will appear in miles or kilometers according to the “Unit Of Measurement” settings. When the next scheduled service is approaching and the key is turned to RUN, the word “Service” will appear on the display, followed by the number of miles or kilometers left. Contact an authorized dealership. The operations in the “Maintenance Plan” will be performed and the message will be reset.

Service Stop/Start System Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the Stop/Start system is not functioning properly and service is required. Contact an authorized dealer for service.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

CAUTION
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.

CAUTION
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure.

YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS

Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light —If Equipped
This light will illuminate when there is a malfunction in one of the exterior bulbs.

Full Brake Control System Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.

Full Brake Control System Off Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate that the Full Brake Control System is off.

Fuel Cutoff Indicator Light —If Equipped
This telltale will illuminate after an accident has occurred, and the system has shut the fuel off.

Icy Road Condition Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate during an icy road condition.

Immobilizer Fail/VPS Electrical Alarm Indicator Light
This telltale will illuminate when the vehicle security system system has detected an attempt to break into the vehicle.

GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS

Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the cruise control is set to the desired speed.

Front Fog Indicator Light —If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.

LaneSense Indicator Light —If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light illuminates solid green when both lane markings have been detected and the system is “armed” and ready to provide visual and torque warnings if an unintentional lane departure occurs.

Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the parking lights or headlights are turned on.

Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode.

NOTE:

A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.

Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport mode is active.

WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS

Light Sensor Failure Indicator Light
This light illuminates when there is light sensor failure. If this light illuminates, have an authorized dealer inspect it.

Speed Warning Indicator Light —If Equipped
The indicator light will illuminate white along with a notification text message (Speed Warning Set to XX followed by unit). When the set speed is exceeded, a single chime will sound along with pop-up message of “Speed Warning Exceeded.” Speed Warning can be turned on and off in the instrument cluster display. The number “55” is only an example of a speed that can be set.

BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS

High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the high beam headlights are on. With the low beams activated, push the multifunction lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, “flash to pass” scenario.

GRAY INDICATOR LIGHTS

Cruise Control Ready/Canceled Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the cruise control has been turned on, but not set, or canceled by the driver.

FAQs

What does the dashboard’s red exclamation point enclosed in a circle mean?

This warning light often denotes a problem with the brake system of the car. If this light illuminates, it’s crucial to check the amount of your braking fluid and have your brakes checked.

What does the warning light in the form of an engine mean?

The check engine light has the appearance of an engine. It indicates an issue with the emission control system or engine. When this light occurs, it is advised to have your car’s engine diagnostics checked.

What does the sign for an oil can mean?

Low oil pressure in the engine is indicated by this warning light. Stop the car right away, check the oil, and top it off if necessary. Low oil pressure while driving can harm the engine.

Why is the dashboard’s battery symbol illuminated?

This light denotes a problem with the charging system of the car, such as a broken alternator or a weak battery. Have your charging system and battery inspected.

What does the exclamation point on the tire mean?

The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) is represented by this symbol. It shows that one or more tires are underinflated. Verify the pressure in your tires, then fill them to the specified levels.

Why is there an exclamation point on the steering wheel?

This warning light typically denotes a power steering system issue. Low power steering fluid levels or a problem with the steering system could be to blame. Check it out as soon as you can.

What does the warning light for the ABS mean?

An fault with the ABS system is indicated by the ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) light. It is advised to have the ABS system and brakes on your car tested.

The airbag light on the dashboard is activated for what reason?

A problem with the vehicle’s airbag system is indicated by the airbag light. It is essential to get it inspected by a skilled expert because safety is a worry.

What does a triangle’s exclamation point mean?

This light frequently refers to the traction control or stability control systems of the car. It can start when the roads are slick. If it continues to run, there might be a system issue.

The gasoline pump icon on the cluster is lit up why?

Typically, this light denotes a fuel system issue. A loose gas cap or a more serious problem might be at blame. Prior to having it examined, check the gas cap. If the light still appears, do so.

What does the symbol for a thermometer mean?

The engine’s temperature is shown by the thermometer icon. The engine is overheating if the temperature gauge is in the red zone. Stop the car and let it cool down before looking into it more.

Why is the exclamation point displayed next to the key symbol?

The security system of the car is connected to this light. If it stays lit after starting the vehicle, there might be a problem with the system, therefore you might need to visit a mechanic.

How does the lane departure indicator light appear?

A car drifting out of its lane is often how the lane departure warning light appears. It shows that the system is running and keeping track of your lane location.

Why is the emblem for the windshield wipers on?

This symbol denotes a windshield wiper system malfunction, such as a wiper blade or washer fluid shortage. Examine and resolve the issue with the wipers.

What should I do if several warning lights illuminate at once?

When several warning lights illuminate simultaneously, it can be a symptom of a bigger problem. It is advised to safely stop, turn off the engine, and seek advice from your owner’s manual or a Fiat repair center.

Useful Links

View full Pdf: 2023 Fiat 500X User Manual
2023 Fiat 500X Fuses and Fuse Box Guidelines

Tags Cluster Warning Lights, Fiat, Fiat 2023, Fiat 500X

Fiat

2023 Fiat 500X Fuses and Fuse Box Guidelines

Welcome to the 2023 Fiat 500X Fuses and Fuse Box, the electrical protection and safety standard for vehicles. We’ll examine the cutting-edge features and innovations that make the 2023 Fiat 500X’s fuse system an essential part of its overall operation in this introduction. Fiat has consistently pushed the envelope of innovation to provide drivers unmatched style, performance, safety, and reliability in the quickly evolving field of automotive engineering. This dedication is best demonstrated by the 2023 Fiat 500X, which has a cutting-edge fuse system and fuse box built to protect the car and its occupants.

The fuse box, which acts as the focal point for safeguarding important electrical components throughout the vehicle, lies at the core of this sophisticated system. Modern technology is incorporated into the 2023 Fiat 500X to guarantee seamless operation of the electrical systems while protecting against any dangers. The fuse box’s contemporary, user-friendly design makes maintenance and troubleshooting easier for both drivers and technicians.

FUSES

General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check the electrical circuit inside the fuse for a break/melt.
Also please be aware that using power outlets for extended periods of time with the engine off may result in vehicle battery discharge.

WARNING

When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, gearbox system), steering system or Body Control Module (BCM) blows, contact an autho-rized dealer.

Blade Fuses

Electrical Circuit
Blade Fuse With Good Electrical Circuit
Blade Fuse With Bad Electrical Circuit

Fuse Removal
To replace a fuse use the extractor attached to the fuse cover (located on the inside of the engine compartment fuse cover.)

Fuse Extractor Location

Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution Unit
The engine compartment fuse panel is part of the Body Control Module (BCM), located on the left side of the engine compartment.

NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for BCM fuse replacement.

Engine Compartment Fuse Location

Fuse Panel And Cover Removal

Mounting Screw
Fuse Cover

Removing Fuse Cover and Locking Screw

Proceed as follows:

Slowly turn the screw counterclockwise.
Slowly release the screw.
Remove the fuse cover by sliding it upward.

Mounting Fuse Cover and Locking Screw

Proceed as follows:

Properly secure the fuse cover to the box, slide completely from top to bottom.
Fully press the screw, using the special screwdriver supplied.
Slowly turn the screw clockwise.
Release the screw.

Battery Fuse Cover Location

Fuse Cover Tabs
Fuse Cover

Cavity	Maxi Fuse	Cartridge Fuse	Mini Fuse	Description
If Equipped *
F01	70 Amp Tan	–	–	Module Body Computer
F02	60 Amp Blue	–	–	Module Body Computer, Rear Distribution Units
F03	–	20 Amp Blue	–	Controller Power Supply Body Computer
F04	–	30 Amp Pink	–	Brake Control Electronics Module
F05	70 Amp Tan	–	–	Electric Power-Assisted Steering
F06	70 Amp Tan	–	–	Engine Cooling fan
F08	–	30 Amp Pink	–	Automatic Transmission, GSM
F09	–	–	5 Amp Tan	Control Module Engine
F10	–	–	10 Amp Red	Horn

Cavity	Maxi Fuse	Cartridge Fuse	Mini Fuse	Description
If Equipped *
F11	–	–	5 Amp Tan	Supply Secondary Loads
F14	–	–	7.5 Amp Brown	WCAC Supply Pump
F15	40 Amp Orange	–	–	Brake Control Module Pump
F16	–	–	5 Amp Tan	Engine Control Module Power, Automatic Transmission
F17	–	–	30 Amp Green	Power Control Module Engine
F18	–	–	30 Amp Green	Power All-Wheel Drive
F19	–	–	7.5 Amp Brown	Air Conditioner Compressor
F20	–	–	5 Amp Tan	Electronic Power Four-Wheel Drive
F21	–	–	15 Amp Blue	Fuel Pump
F22	–	–	10 Amp Red	Supply Primary Loads

Cavity	Maxi Fuse	Cartridge Fuse	Mini Fuse	Description
If Equipped *
F23	–	–	20 Amp Yellow (Customer Installed)	Power Outlet (Battery Powered)
F24	–	–	15 Amp Blue	Electronic Unit Supply Automatic Transmission
F30	–	–	30 Amp Green	Heated Windshield *
F82	–	20 Amp Blue	–	Control Module Engine
F83	–	40 Amp Green	–	Air Conditioning Fan
F84	–	–	20 Amp Yellow	Power Outlet (Ignition Powered)
F87	–	–	5 Amp Tan	Gear Selector Automatic Transmission
F88	–	–	7.5 Amp Brown	Heated Outside Mirrors
F89	–	30 Amp Pink	–	Heated Rear Window
F90	–	–	5 Amp Tan	IBS Sensor (Battery State of Charge)

Body Computer Fuse Center
The controller is located at the left side of the steering column at the bottom of the instrument panel. For the fuse replacement see an authorized dealer.

Cavity	Mini Fuse	Description
F31	7.5 Amp Brown	Fan Air Conditioning, Power Socket
F33	20 Amp Yellow	Power Window Front (Passenger Side)
F34	20 Amp Yellow	Power Window Front (Driver’s Side)
F36	15 Amp Blue	Supply Uconnect System, Air Conditioning, USB Port, Rear lateral ceiling light in case of open roof, EOBD port
F37	10 Amp Red	System Power Forward Collision Warning Plus, All-Wheel Drive (AWD), IPC, Central stack switches, Brake Pedal Switch (NC)
F38	20 Amp Yellow	Central Locking
F42	7.5 Amp Brown	BSM – Brake Control Module, EPS – Electric Power-Assisted Steering
F43	20 Amp Yellow	Bi-directional Pump Washer
F47	20 Amp Yellow	Power Rear Window (Driver Side)
F48	20 Amp Yellow	Power Rear Window (Passenger Side)
F49	7.5 Amp Brown	Supply ParkSense, Spot Lights Front Dome, Internal Electrochromic Mirror, Heated Front Seats, SGW, Sunroof Motor.
F50	7.5 Amp Brown	Supply Air Bag
F51	7.5 Amp Brown	Air Conditioning Compressor, Plaque Automatic Transmission, Rear Camera, Air Conditioning, LDW – Lane Departure Warning, ASS – Auxiliary Stack Switch, DSU – Drive Selector Unit, Reverse gear switch, side mirrors and rear window defrost
F53	7.5 Amp Brown	Supply IPC/Starter Device/System Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ , Brake Pedal Switch (NA), EPB – Electric Parking Brake

Rear Cargo Fuse Cavities

Cavity	Mini Fuse	Description
If Equipped *
F2	–	–
F3	20 Amp Yellow	Electric Sunroof
F5	30 Amp Green	Power Seat (driver side) *
F6	7.5 Amp Brown	Power Seat (driver side) Lumbar Adjustment *
F8	20 Amp Yellow	Heating Front Seats

BULB REPLACEMENT

General Information

Before you replace a bulb, check the contacts to be sure they are not oxidized.
Replace the bulbs with the same type and wattage.
After replacing a light bulb, always check the correct orientation.
Before replacing a bulb that is not functioning, check that the fuse is intact.

NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.

Interior Lamps
Lamp Name	Lamp Number
Front Courtesy Light	C5W
Front Courtesy Lights (Sun Visors)	C5W
Rear Dome Light (Models Without Retractable Roof)	C5W
Rear Interior Lights (Models With Retractable Roof)	C5W
Interior Lights	W5W
Dome Light (Glove Compartment)	W5W

Exterior Lamps
Lamp Name	Lamp Number
Low Beam/High Beam Headlamps	HIR2
Optional Low Beam/High Bean Headlamps	LED
Front Position/Daytime Running Lights (DRL)	LED
Front Direction Indicator Lamps	WY21W
Fog Lamps (Halogen)	H11
Fog Lamps (LED)	LED
Side Indicators (Side View Mirror)	WY5W
Side Marker	LED
Tail/Brake Lights	LED
Turn Indicators	WY21W
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)	LED
Reverse	P21W
License Plate Lamp	W5W

Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Headlamps

Front Lamps

Headlamps
Daytime Running Lamps
Directional Indicators
Fog Lamps — If Equipped

Hi/Lo Beam Light Halogen
See the following steps for bulb replacement:

Open the engine compartment and remove the headlamp bulb cap.
Rotate the headlamp bulb socket counterclockwise then pull outwards.
Release the locking tab on the headlamp bulb connector and remove the bulb and socket.
Install the new headlamp bulb making sure it is properly locked.
Install the headlamp bulb and socket; align the tabs and turn it clockwise making sure it is properly locked.

WARNING
Carry out the operation of replacing lamps only with the engine off. Also make sure that the engine is cold, to avoid the danger of burns.

LED Main Beam/Dipped Beam Headlights/Fog Lights — If Equipped
For replacing these bulbs, contact an authorized dealership.

Side Lights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
The side lights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) are LED-type. To replace them, contact an authorized dealership.

Side Marker
Side marker lights are LED-type. For replacing these bulbs, contact an authorized dealer

Front Direction Indicator Lamp
See the following steps for bulb replacement:

Turn the front wheels completely.
Use a suitable tool to remove the access door.
Turn the bulb and bulb holder assembly counter-clockwise and then remove it sliding it outwards.
Replace the bayonet-fitted bulb.
Finally, refit the access door, fully tightening screws.

Fog Lights (Halogen)
See the following steps for bulb replacement:

Turn the front wheels completely.
Use a suitable tool to remove the access door.
Turn the bulb and bulb holder assembly counter-clockwise and then remove it sliding it outwards.Fog Lamp Bulb Location
Replace the bayonet-fitted bulb.
Finally, refit the inspection door, fully tightening fixing screws.

Side Indicators on External Rear View Mirrors – If Equipped

CAUTION
The procedure is described as a guideline. For the replacement of the lamp it is recommended that you contact an authorized dealer.

See the following steps for bulb replacement:

Remove the mirror cap on the outside rear view mirror.
Mirror Cap
1. Mirror Cover
2. Side Indicator Lens
3. Side Indicator Bulb Location
Remove the transparent lens assembly as shown.
Remove the bulb socket and bulb from the transparent lens assembly by rotating the socket counterclockwise.
Remove the bulb from the bulb socket by pulling the bulb straight out.
Insert the new bulb, making sure that it is locked into place
Reinstall the socket into the transparent lens assembly.
Reinstall the cover on the outside rear view mirror, making sure it is locked into place.

Rear Tail Lamps

Tail Light

Tail lights/Brake Lights
Direction indicator
REVERSE lights

Tail Lamps
The tail lights are LED-type. For replacing these bulbs, contact an authorized dealership.

Brake Lights
The brake lights are LED-type. For replacing these bulbs, contact an authorized dealership.

Side Marker
Side marker lights are LED-type. For replacing these bulbs, contact an authorized dealer

3th Stop Lamp
The CHMSL is LED. For their replacement see an authorized dealer.

Reversing Light & Rear Direction Indicators
See the following steps for bulb replacement:

Open liftgate
Using a suitable tool, undo the two inboard screws, then release the light cluster from the respective pin fasteners pulling it carefully.
Disconnect the connector, then undo the two screws to access the bulbs.
Locate faulty bulb and press slightly and turn at the same time: counterclockwise to extract; clockwise to install.
Reposition the bulb holder assembly in the headlight body, proceed until you hear the tabs click.
Reinstall tail lamp assembly and close liftgate.

License Plate Lights
See the following steps for bulb replacement:
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:

Using a suitable tool remove the license plate lens.License Plate Light
Remove the bulbs from the individual side contacts.
Insert the new bulbs, and ensure that they are properly locked between the contacts.
Reinstall the license plate lens.

NOTE:
If removing the license plate lens using a suitable tool, be sure to cover the tip of the suitable tool with a cloth so no damage is done to the lenses or the vehicle paint.

Replacing Interior Bulbs

Front Courtesy Light
See the following steps for bulb replacement:

Using a suitable tool remove the front courtesy light as shown.
Release the retainer clips and bulb housing as shown.
Replace the bulbs by pulling straight out of bulb housing.
Insert the new bulbs, making sure that they are properly locked.
Reassemble the bulb housing and courtesy light housing making sure that they are properly locked.
Install the front courtesy light making sure that it is properly locked.

Dome Light Vanity Mirror
See the following steps for bulb replacement:

Lift the cover of the mirror and pull out the visor mirror light cover.
Replace the bulb, releasing it from the side contacts, and then insert the new bulb, making sure that it is properly locked between the contacts.
1. Visor Mirror Cover
2. Visor Mirror Light
Reinstall the visor mirror light cover making sure that it is properly locked.
Finally lower the visor mirror cover to the mirror.

Dome Light Glove Compartment
See the following steps for bulb replacement:

Open the glove compartment.
Place your fingers inside the light assembly, pull the bulb to replace it.
Bulb Removal/Installation
Insert the new bulb, making sure it is properly locked.

Rear Dome Light — Without Retractable Roof See the following steps for bulb replacement:

Using a suitable tool release the lamp assembly at both the ends.
Open the flap and replace the bulb.
Insert the new bulb, locking it between the contacts.
Reinstall the dome light.

Dome Light
See the following steps for bulb replacement:

Lower the handle in the direction shown to remove the dome light.
Replace the bulb by removing it from the side contacts.
Insert the new bulb, locking it between the contacts.
Reinstall the dome light.

Interior Cargo Lights
See the following steps for bulb replacement:

Open the luggage compartment and remove the dome light assembly.
Open the light cover and replace the bulb.
Close the light cover over the bulb.
Reinstall the dome light in its correct position.

WARNING

Before proceeding with the lamp replacement, wait for the lamp to cool: DANGER OF BURNS!
Modifications or repair of the electrical system performed incorrectly and without taking into account the technical characteristics can cause malfunctions with the risk of fire.
Halogen lamps contain gas under pressure, in the event of breakage be careful of the projection of fragments of glass.
Halogen lamps must be handled by touching only the metallic part. If the transparent bulb is in contact with the fingers, reduces the intensity of the emitted light and you can also affect the life of the lamp. In case of accidental contact, rub the bulb with a cloth dampened with alcohol and allow to dry.

FAQs

What does an automobile fuse do?

A fuse is a type of electrical safety device that guards against electrical overloads and short circuits by cutting off the circuit if they occur.

In a 2023 Fiat 500X, where is the fuse box?

In a 2023 Fiat 500X, the fuse box is normally found in the engine bay.

I need to go to the fuse box.

The fuse box cover is located when you lift the car’s hood. To access the fuses, remove the lid.

What do the various symbols on fuse boxes mean?

The many electrical parts of your car are represented by the symbols on the fuse box cover. A thorough schematic can be found in the owner’s handbook.

How do I recognize a blown fuse?

The fuse can be visually inspected. The fuse blows if the metal strip inside is damaged or melts.

What equipment do I need to change a fuse?

The only tools typically required are a set of needle-nose pliers or a fuse puller, both of which are frequently found in the fuse box.

Can I use a fuse with a different amperage rating to replace a blown one?

No, in order to prevent the electrical system from being harmed, it’s crucial to replace a blown fuse with one of the same amperage rating.

How can I figure out the amperage I need for a replacement fuse?

For details on the appropriate amperage for each circuit, consult your owner’s manual or the cover of the fuse box.

How do I handle a fuse that keeps blowing repeatedly?

If a fuse keeps blowing, there may be an electrical problem underneath. Consult a skilled mechanic to identify the issue and fix it.

Can I change fuses on my Fiat 500X by myself, or should I have a mechanic look them over?

If you feel comfortable doing it, you can change fuses on your own, but for instructions, refer to the owner’s manual. It is recommended to seek professional assistance for complicated electrical problems.

What are a few typical causes of blown fuses in cars?

A short circuit, malfunctioning electrical parts, or overloading a circuit with too many accessories are typical causes.

In the fuse box, are there extra fuses?

In the fuse box, there can be extra fuses. These are intended as replacements.

How frequently should I examine my fuses?

As part of routine maintenance, check your fuses frequently, especially if you suffer electrical problems.

In my Fiat 500X, can I use aftermarket fuses?

Use of genuine or premium replacement fuses is advised to offer adequate protection and avoid electrical issues.

Is there a particular sequence that fuses should be changed in?

Although there is no set sequence, it is a good idea to disconnect the battery and turn off the ignition before replacing fuses to guarantee safety.

Useful Links

View full Pdf: 2023 Fiat 500X User Manual
2023 Fiat 500X Engine Oil and Fluids Operations

Tags Fiat, Fiat 500X, Fuse Box, Fuses

Fiat

2023 Fiat 500X Engine Oil and Fluids Operations

Welcome to the world of automotive innovation, where the 2023 Fiat 500X combines cutting-edge technology with Italian craftsmanship. We’ll look into one of the crucial elements that keeps this fantastic vehicle running smoothly in this introduction: the engine oil and fluids. The 2023 Fiat 500X is more than simply a vehicle; it is the epitome of fashion, performance, and usability. A complex powertrain that relies on premium engine oil and fluids to give a great driving experience is hidden beneath the vehicle’s svelte and unique look.

The 2023 Fiat 500X’s power steering system offers smooth control, making parking and maneuvering a snap. The power steering fluid is designed to keep the steering reaction responsive and accurate. Rest confident that these painstakingly designed engine oils and fluids are hard at work behind the scenes, ensuring that your driving experience with the 2023 Fiat 500X is nothing short of extraordinary. So fasten your seatbelt and prepare to travel the globe in a car that combines Italian design with cutting-edge technology, all while the engine oil and fluids keep everything operating smoothly.

ENGINE OIL

Engine Oil Selection
For the proper engine oil selection.

American Petroleum Institute (API) Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified by the API. The manufacturer only recommends API trademark oils.

The API Starburst trademark certifies 0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40 and 5W-40 engine oil.

CAUTION
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

ENGINE OIL FILTER

The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change.

Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar® filters should be used. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter is unavailable only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter Performance Requirements.

ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER

For the proper maintenance intervals.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified filters should be used.

ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION

WARNING

Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time regardless of ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)

Conditions that would require replacement:

Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
Belt slips
Groove jumping (belt does not maintain correct position on pulley)
Belt broken (identify and correct problem before new belt is installed)
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)

Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.

AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE

WARNING

Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information Book, located in your owner’s information kit, for further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician.

CAUTION
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluo-roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by an authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.

Cabin Air Filter
See an authorized dealer for service.

BODY LUBRICATION

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as Mopar® Spray White Lube to ensure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.

The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected periodically, not just when wiper performance problems are experienced. This inspection should include the following points:

Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue

If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.

Service Position Strategy
The service position allows the wiper blades to be placed in a position that allows the wiper blades to be easily changed.
To enable the Service Position Strategy, the wipers must be in the Park position before placing the ignition in the OFF position. Service Mode must be activated within two minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position. To have a correct activation of strategy, the Service Position command (anti-panic) must be active for at least half a second. At every valid activation of Service Position command, the wiper blades are activated for 250 ms. The Service Position command can be repeated several times to bring the blades into the desired position, up to a maximum of three times.
After three subsequent activations the strategy is disabled.

Function Deactivation:
The functionality is reset if:

The ignition is turned to the RUN position.
Number of subsequent activations is three.
Two minute timer has expired after placing the ignition OFF.

NOTE:
When turning the ignition ON, the blades will go into the parking position.

Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation

Lift the front wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade off of the windshield.
Push the release button on the arm of the wiper blade.
Push the wiper blade up and remove it.
Install the wiper blade and firmly push the wiper blade until it snaps into place.

Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation

Carefully lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade off of the liftgate glass.
Grab and hold the wiper arm closest to the wiper blade end while pushing the wiper blade towards the liftgate glass to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper blade holder on the wiper arm.
Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly push the wiper blade until it snaps into place.

EXHAUST SYSTEM

WARNING

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.

CAUTION

The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle.

NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.

To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:

Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition components disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.

COOLING SYSTEM

WARNING

You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The fan starts automatically and may start at any time, whether the engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the OFF position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition is in the ON position.

Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill

NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact an authorized dealer. If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals.

NOTE:

Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant, may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. OAT engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally compatible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or anti-rust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact an authorized dealer.

Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with a